Table of Contents
- Preface
- Contents
- Overview
- Machine Features
- Color and Image Quality Functions
- Guides Provided with the Machine
- About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
- Menu Map
- 1 Legal and Safety Information
- Notice
- Safety Conventions in This Guide
- Environment
- Precautions for Use
- Laser Safety (Europe)
- SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA)
- Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power
- Compliance and Conformity
- Other precautions (for users in California, the United States)
- Warranty (the United States and Canada)
- Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning
- EN ISO 7779
- EK1-ITB 2000
- Wireless Connection (Mexico only)
- Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped)
- Limited Use of This Product (If equipped)
- Legal Information
- Energy Saving Control Function
- Automatic 2-Sided Print Function
- Resource Saving - Paper
- Environmental benefits of "Power Management"
- Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program
- Notice
- 2 Installing and Setting up the Machine
- Part Names (Machine Exterior)
- Part Names (Connectors/Interior)
- Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached)
- Connecting the Machine and Other Devices
- Connecting Cables
- Power On/Off
- Using the Operation Panel
- Login/Logout
- Default Settings of the Machine
- Network Setup
- Energy Saver function
- Quiet Mode
- Installing Software
- Checking the Counter
- Additional Preparations for the Administrator
- Command Center RX
- Transferring Data from Our Other Products
- 3 Preparation before Use
- 4 Printing from PC
- Printer Driver Properties Screen
- Printing from PC
- Printing from the Handheld Device
- Printing Data Saved in the Printer
- Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job
- Printing Documents from Private Print Box
- Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box
- Printing Document from Stored Job Box
- Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box
- Printing Document from Quick Copy Box
- Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box
- Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box
- Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box
- Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
- 5 Operation on the Machine
- Loading Originals
- Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray
- Program
- Select Key Settings
- Copying
- Frequently-Used Sending Method
- Sending Document via E-mail
- Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
- Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)
- Scanning using TWAIN or WIA
- Useful Sending Method
- WSD Scan
- Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)
- Send to Me (E-mail)
- Canceling Sending Jobs
- Handling Destination
- How to use the FAX Function
- Using Document Boxes
- Operating using Removable USB Memory
- 6 Using Various Functions
- Functions Available on the Machine
- Functions
- Paper Selection
- Collate
- Duplex
- Zoom
- Combine
- Original Size
- Original Orientation
- Mixed Size Originals
- Original Image
- Density
- EcoPrint
- Continuous Scan
- File Name Entry
- Job Finish Notice
- Priority Override
- Color Selection
- Color Balance
- Sharpness
- Contrast
- Background Density Adj. (Background Density Adjustment)
- Saturation
- Skip Blank Page
- Scan Resolution
- Sending Size
- File Format
- Subject/Body
- FTP Encrypted TX
- File Separation
- Storing Size
- Encrypted PDF
- JPEG/TIFF Print
- XPS Fit to Page
- 7 Status/Job Cancel
- 8 Setup and Registration (System Menu)
- 9 User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting)
- Overview of User Login Administration
- Enabling User Login Administration
- Setting User Login Administration
- Authentication Security
- Adding a User (Local User List)
- Changing User Properties
- User Login Administration for Printing
- Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN
- Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA
- Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC
- Group Authorization Settings
- Guest Authorization Set.
- Obtain NW User Property
- ID Card Settings
- PIN Login Settings
- Using User Login Administration
- Overview of Job Accounting
- Enabling Job Accounting
- Setting an Account
- Configuring Job Accounting
- Using Job Accounting
- Unknown User Settings
- 10 Troubleshooting
- 11 Appendix
KYOCERA M5521cdw User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for M5521cdw by KYOCERA which is a product in the Multifunctionals category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
OPERATION GUIDE
PRINT COPY SCAN FAX
ECOSYS M5521cdn
ECOSYS M5521cdw
> Preface
i
Preface
Thank you for purchasing this machine.
This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance, and take
simple troubleshooting measures as needed so that the machine can always be used in the optimum condition.
Please read this Operation Guide before using the machine.
To maintain quality, we recommend using genuine Kyocera toner containers, which must
pass numerous quality inspections.
The use of non-genuine toner containers may cause failure.
We will not be liable for any damages caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine.
A label is affixed to our genuine supplies, as shown below.
Checking the Equipment's Serial Number
The equipment's serial number is printed in the location shown in the figure.
You'll need the equipment's serial number when contacting your Service Representative. Please check the number
before contacting your Service Representative.
ii
Contents
Preface ..................................................................................................................................... i
Contents.................................................................................................................................. ii
Overview ................................................................................................................................ ix
Machine Features ................................................................................................................... x
Color and Image Quality Functions................................................................................... xiv
Basic Color Modes ...................................................................................................... xiv
Adjusting Image Quality and Color............................................................................... xv
Guides Provided with the Machine.................................................................................... xvi
About the Operation Guide (this Guide) ......................................................................... xviii
Structure of the guide................................................................................................. xviii
Conventions Used in This Guide................................................................................. xix
Menu Map............................................................................................................................. xxi
1 Legal and Safety Information ................................................................ 1-1
Notice ................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Safety Conventions in This Guide ............................................................................. 1-2
Environment .............................................................................................................. 1-3
Precautions for Use ................................................................................................... 1-4
Laser Safety (Europe) ............................................................................................... 1-5
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) ........................................................................... 1-6
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ...................................... 1-7
Compliance and Conformity ...................................................................................... 1-7
Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) ................................... 1-7
Warranty (the United States and Canada) ................................................................ 1-8
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning .................................................................... 1-9
EN ISO 7779 ............................................................................................................. 1-9
EK1-ITB 2000 ............................................................................................................ 1-9
Wireless Connection (Mexico only) ........................................................................... 1-9
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) ................................. 1-9
Limited Use of This Product (If equipped) ............................................................... 1-10
Legal Information .................................................................................................... 1-11
Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................. 1-17
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function ............................................................................ 1-17
Resource Saving - Paper ........................................................................................ 1-17
Environmental benefits of "Power Management" .................................................... 1-17
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program ............................................................... 1-17
2 Installing and Setting up the Machine .................................................. 2-1
Part Names (Machine Exterior) ........................................................................................ 2-2
Part Names (Connectors/Interior) .................................................................................... 2-4
Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached) ........................................................ 2-6
Connecting the Machine and Other Devices .................................................................. 2-7
Connecting Cables ............................................................................................................ 2-8
Connecting LAN Cable .............................................................................................. 2-8
Connecting USB Cable ............................................................................................. 2-9
Connecting the Power Cable .................................................................................... 2-9
Power On/Off ................................................................................................................... 2-10
Power On ................................................................................................................ 2-10
Power Off ................................................................................................................ 2-10
Using the Operation Panel ............................................................................................. 2-11
Operation Panel Keys ............................................................................................. 2-11
Operation Method ................................................................................................... 2-13
Check the original and paper settings ..................................................................... 2-14
Help Screen ............................................................................................................ 2-14
Login/Logout ................................................................................................................... 2-15
Login ....................................................................................................................... 2-15
iii
Logout ..................................................................................................................... 2-16
Default Settings of the Machine ..................................................................................... 2-17
Setting Date and Time ............................................................................................ 2-17
Network Setup ................................................................................................................. 2-18
Configuring the Wired Network ............................................................................... 2-18
Configuring the Wireless Network ........................................................................... 2-20
Setting Wi-Fi Direct ................................................................................................. 2-24
Energy Saver function .................................................................................................... 2-26
Sleep ....................................................................................................................... 2-26
Auto Sleep ............................................................................................................... 2-27
Sleep Rules (models for Europe) ............................................................................ 2-27
Sleep Level (Energy Saver and Quick Recovery) (models except for Europe) ...... 2-28
Power Off Rule (models for Europe) ....................................................................... 2-28
Quiet Mode ....................................................................................................................... 2-29
Installing Software .......................................................................................................... 2-30
Software on DVD (Windows) .................................................................................. 2-30
Installing Software in Windows ............................................................................... 2-31
Uninstalling the Software ........................................................................................ 2-37
Installing Software in Mac Computer ...................................................................... 2-38
Setting TWAIN Driver .............................................................................................. 2-40
Setting WIA Driver ................................................................................................... 2-42
Checking the Counter ..................................................................................................... 2-43
Additional Preparations for the Administrator ............................................................. 2-44
Sending Documents to a PC ................................................................................... 2-44
Strengthening the Security ...................................................................................... 2-44
Command Center RX ...................................................................................................... 2-45
Accessing Command Center RX ............................................................................ 2-46
Changing Security Settings ..................................................................................... 2-47
Changing Device Information .................................................................................. 2-49
E-mail Settings ........................................................................................................ 2-51
Registering Destinations ......................................................................................... 2-55
Transferring Data from Our Other Products ................................................................. 2-56
Migrating the Address Book .................................................................................... 2-56
3 Preparation before Use .......................................................................... 3-1
Loading Paper ................................................................................................................... 3-2
Precaution for Loading Paper ................................................................................... 3-2
Selecting the Paper Feeder Units ............................................................................. 3-3
Loading in the Cassette 1 ......................................................................................... 3-4
Loading in the Cassette 2 ......................................................................................... 3-7
Precautions for Outputting Paper .................................................................................... 3-9
Paper Stopper ........................................................................................................... 3-9
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC .............................. 3-10
Making a note of the computer name and full computer name ............................... 3-10
Making a note of the user name and domain name ................................................ 3-11
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ................................ 3-12
Configuring Windows Firewall ................................................................................. 3-15
Registering Destinations in the Address Book ............................................................ 3-20
Adding a Destination (Address Book) ..................................................................... 3-20
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) .................................... 3-27
4 Printing from PC ..................................................................................... 4-1
Printer Driver Properties Screen ...................................................................................... 4-2
Displaying the Printer Driver Help ............................................................................. 4-3
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 8.1) .................................... 4-3
Printing from PC ................................................................................................................ 4-4
Printing on Standard Sized Paper ............................................................................. 4-4
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper ...................................................................... 4-6
iv
Canceling Printing from a Computer ......................................................................... 4-8
Printing from the Handheld Device ................................................................................. 4-9
Printing by AirPrint .................................................................................................... 4-9
Printing by Google Cloud Print .................................................................................. 4-9
Printing by Mopria ..................................................................................................... 4-9
Printing with Wi-Fi Direct ........................................................................................... 4-9
Printing Data Saved in the Printer ................................................................................. 4-10
Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job ............................... 4-10
Printing Documents from Private Print Box ............................................................. 4-11
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box ......................................... 4-11
Printing Document from Stored Job Box ................................................................. 4-12
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box ........................................... 4-13
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box ................................................................ 4-14
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box .......................................... 4-14
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box .......................................................... 4-15
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box .................................... 4-16
Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor) ............................................................ 4-17
Accessing the Status Monitor .................................................................................. 4-17
Exiting the Status Monitor ....................................................................................... 4-17
Quick View State ..................................................................................................... 4-17
Printing Progress Tab ............................................................................................. 4-18
Paper Tray Status Tab ............................................................................................ 4-18
Toner Status Tab .................................................................................................... 4-18
Alert Tab .................................................................................................................. 4-19
Status Monitor Context Menu .................................................................................. 4-19
Status Monitor Notification Settings ........................................................................ 4-20
5 Operation on the Machine ..................................................................... 5-1
Loading Originals .............................................................................................................. 5-2
Placing Originals on the Platen ................................................................................. 5-2
Loading Originals in the Document Processor .......................................................... 5-3
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray ......................................................................... 5-5
Program .............................................................................................................................. 5-8
Registering Programs ............................................................................................... 5-8
Recalling Program ..................................................................................................... 5-9
Overwriting Program ............................................................................................... 5-10
Deleting Program .................................................................................................... 5-10
Select Key Settings ......................................................................................................... 5-11
Copying ............................................................................................................................ 5-12
Basic Operation ....................................................................................................... 5-12
Canceling Jobs ........................................................................................................ 5-13
Frequently-Used Sending Method ................................................................................. 5-14
Sending Document via E-mail ........................................................................................ 5-15
Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-15
Sending Scanned Document via E-mail .................................................................. 5-15
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) ............. 5-16
Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-16
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer ................................ 5-16
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) ................................... 5-18
Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-18
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server ..................................................... 5-18
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA ...................................................................................... 5-20
Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-20
Scanning Document Using Application ................................................................... 5-20
Useful Sending Method .................................................................................................. 5-21
WSD Scan ........................................................................................................................ 5-22
Installing Driver Software ........................................................................................ 5-22
WSD scan ............................................................................................................... 5-23
v
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) ....................................... 5-25
Send to Me (E-mail) ......................................................................................................... 5-26
Sending a document to the mail address of the logged in user .............................. 5-26
Canceling Sending Jobs ................................................................................................. 5-27
Handling Destination ...................................................................................................... 5-28
Specifying Destination ............................................................................................. 5-28
Choosing from the Address Book ........................................................................... 5-28
Choosing from the External Address Book ............................................................. 5-29
Choosing from the One Touch Key ......................................................................... 5-30
Checking and Editing Destinations ......................................................................... 5-31
Confirmation Screen of Destinations ....................................................................... 5-32
Recall ...................................................................................................................... 5-32
How to use the FAX Function ........................................................................................ 5-33
Using Document Boxes .................................................................................................. 5-34
What is Job Box? .................................................................................................... 5-34
What is Removable Memory Box? .......................................................................... 5-34
What is Sub Address Box/Polling Box? .................................................................. 5-34
Operating using Removable USB Memory ................................................................... 5-35
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory ........................................ 5-35
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ................................................ 5-37
Check the USB Memory Information ....................................................................... 5-38
Removing USB Memory .......................................................................................... 5-38
6 Using Various Functions ....................................................................... 6-1
Functions Available on the Machine ............................................................................... 6-2
About Functions Available on the Machine ............................................................... 6-2
How to Select Functions ........................................................................................... 6-2
Copy .......................................................................................................................... 6-3
Send .......................................................................................................................... 6-4
Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) .............................................. 6-5
Functions ........................................................................................................................... 6-7
Paper Selection ......................................................................................................... 6-8
Collate ....................................................................................................................... 6-9
Duplex ....................................................................................................................... 6-9
Zoom ....................................................................................................................... 6-11
Combine .................................................................................................................. 6-13
Original Size ............................................................................................................ 6-15
Original Orientation ................................................................................................. 6-15
Mixed Size Originals ............................................................................................... 6-16
Original Image ......................................................................................................... 6-16
Density .................................................................................................................... 6-17
EcoPrint ................................................................................................................... 6-17
Continuous Scan ..................................................................................................... 6-17
File Name Entry ...................................................................................................... 6-18
Job Finish Notice ..................................................................................................... 6-18
Priority Override ...................................................................................................... 6-18
Color Selection ........................................................................................................ 6-19
Color Balance .......................................................................................................... 6-19
Sharpness ............................................................................................................... 6-20
Contrast ................................................................................................................... 6-20
Background Density Adj. (Background Density Adjustment) .................................. 6-21
Saturation ................................................................................................................ 6-21
Skip Blank Page ...................................................................................................... 6-22
Scan Resolution ...................................................................................................... 6-22
Sending Size ........................................................................................................... 6-23
File Format .............................................................................................................. 6-24
Subject/Body ........................................................................................................... 6-28
FTP Encrypted TX ................................................................................................... 6-28
File Separation ........................................................................................................ 6-28
vi
Storing Size ............................................................................................................. 6-29
Encrypted PDF ........................................................................................................ 6-29
JPEG/TIFF Print ...................................................................................................... 6-30
XPS Fit to Page ....................................................................................................... 6-30
7 Status/Job Cancel .................................................................................. 7-1
Checking Job Status ......................................................................................................... 7-2
Details of the Status Screens .................................................................................... 7-4
Checking Job History ....................................................................................................... 7-8
Sending the Log History .......................................................................................... 7-12
Job Operation .................................................................................................................. 7-13
Pause and Resumption of Jobs .............................................................................. 7-13
Canceling of Jobs .................................................................................................... 7-13
Device/Communication ................................................................................................... 7-14
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) ................... 7-15
8 Setup and Registration (System Menu) ............................................... 8-1
System Menu ..................................................................................................................... 8-2
Operation Method ..................................................................................................... 8-2
System Menu Settings .............................................................................................. 8-3
Report ....................................................................................................................... 8-5
System/Network ........................................................................................................ 8-7
User/Job Account .................................................................................................... 8-18
User Property .......................................................................................................... 8-18
Common Settings .................................................................................................... 8-19
Copy ........................................................................................................................ 8-32
Printer ...................................................................................................................... 8-33
Send ........................................................................................................................ 8-35
FAX ......................................................................................................................... 8-36
Document Box ......................................................................................................... 8-36
Edit Destination ....................................................................................................... 8-37
Adjust/Maint. ........................................................................................................... 8-38
9 User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) 9-1
Overview of User Login Administration .......................................................................... 9-2
Managing the Job Account from PC ......................................................................... 9-2
Enabling User Login Administration ............................................................................... 9-3
Setting User Login Administration .................................................................................. 9-5
Authentication Security ............................................................................................. 9-5
Adding a User (Local User List) ................................................................................ 9-6
Changing User Properties ......................................................................................... 9-8
User Login Administration for Printing ..................................................................... 9-10
Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN ............................................................ 9-11
Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA ................................................................. 9-12
Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC .................................................... 9-13
Group Authorization Settings .................................................................................. 9-14
Guest Authorization Set. ......................................................................................... 9-15
Obtain NW User Property ....................................................................................... 9-18
ID Card Settings ...................................................................................................... 9-19
PIN Login Settings .................................................................................................. 9-20
Using User Login Administration .................................................................................. 9-21
Login/Logout ........................................................................................................... 9-21
Overview of Job Accounting .......................................................................................... 9-22
To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs Printed from a PC ..................... 9-22
Enabling Job Accounting ............................................................................................... 9-23
Job Accounting Access ........................................................................................... 9-24
vii
Setting an Account .......................................................................................................... 9-25
Adding an Account .................................................................................................. 9-25
Restricting the Use of the Machine ......................................................................... 9-27
Editing an Account .................................................................................................. 9-28
Deleting an Account ................................................................................................ 9-29
Job Accounting for Printing ..................................................................................... 9-30
Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN .................................................................. 9-31
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA ....................................................................... 9-32
Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer .................................... 9-33
Configuring Job Accounting .......................................................................................... 9-34
Default Setting ......................................................................................................... 9-34
Counting the Number of Pages Printed .................................................................. 9-35
Print Accounting Report .......................................................................................... 9-36
Using Job Accounting .................................................................................................... 9-37
Login/Logout ........................................................................................................... 9-37
Unknown User Settings .................................................................................................. 9-38
Unknown ID Job ...................................................................................................... 9-38
Registering Information for a User whose ID is Unknown ....................................... 9-39
10 Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 10-1
Regular Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 10-2
Cleaning .................................................................................................................. 10-2
Cleaning Glass Platen ............................................................................................. 10-2
Cleaning Slit Grass ................................................................................................. 10-3
Cleaning Paper Transfer Unit .................................................................................. 10-4
Toner Container Replacement ................................................................................ 10-5
Loading Paper ......................................................................................................... 10-8
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................. 10-9
Solving Malfunctions ............................................................................................... 10-9
Machine Operation Trouble ..................................................................................... 10-9
Printed Image Trouble ........................................................................................... 10-12
Color printing trouble ............................................................................................. 10-15
Responding to Messages ...................................................................................... 10-16
Adjustment/Maintenance .............................................................................................. 10-27
Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance ................................................................... 10-27
ColorCalibration .................................................................................................... 10-27
Color Regist. ......................................................................................................... 10-28
Clearing Paper Jams ..................................................................................................... 10-32
Jam Location Indicators ........................................................................................ 10-32
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1 ............................................................ 10-33
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 2 ............................................................ 10-34
Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray .......................................... 10-36
Remove any jammed paper in Rear Cover 1 ........................................................ 10-39
Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor ...................................... 10-42
11 Appendix ............................................................................................... 11-1
Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................ 11-2
Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................. 11-2
Optional Applications .............................................................................................. 11-6
Starting Application Use .......................................................................................... 11-6
Checking Details of Application ............................................................................... 11-7
Character Entry Method .................................................................................................. 11-8
Using the Keys ........................................................................................................ 11-8
Selecting Type of Characters .................................................................................. 11-9
Characters That Can be Entered Using the Numeric Keys ..................................... 11-9
Entering Symbols .................................................................................................. 11-10
Entering Characters .............................................................................................. 11-10
Entering Using the Character Selection Screen .................................................... 11-12
viii
Paper .............................................................................................................................. 11-13
Basic Paper Specifications .................................................................................... 11-13
Choosing the Appropriate Paper ........................................................................... 11-14
Special Paper ........................................................................................................ 11-17
Specifications ................................................................................................................ 11-21
Machine ................................................................................................................. 11-21
Copy Functions ..................................................................................................... 11-22
Printer Functions ................................................................................................... 11-23
Scanner Functions ................................................................................................ 11-23
Document Processor ............................................................................................. 11-24
Paper Feeder ........................................................................................................ 11-24
Glossary ......................................................................................................................... 11-25
Index ............................................................................................................................ Index-1
ix
> Overview
Overview
NOTE
• Before using the machine, be sure to read the following:
Legal and Safety Information (page 1-1)
• To prepare the device for use, including setting up cable connections and installing software.
Installing and Setting up the Machine (page 2-1)
• To learn how to load paper, set up shared folders, and add addresses to the address book, refer to the following:
Preparation before Use (page 3-1)
Input Data
Operations from your PC
Document
Box functions
Security
Output Data
Copy functions
Printer functions USB memory
Send functions
Fax functions
Original Electronic data Fax dataUSB memory
FAX Operation
Guide
This function serves a variety of purposes,
including saving data in the machine and on a USB
memory stick.
Printing Data Saved in the Printer (page 4-10)
You can apply the various machine
security levels to your specific needs.
Frequently-Used Sending
Method (page 5-14)
Command Center RX
You can check the status and change
the settings of the machine from a Web
browser on your computer.
Command Center RX (page 2-45)
Command Center RX User Guide
Strengthen security
(page xi)
Copying (page 5-12)
Printing from PC (page 4-1)
Saving Documents to
USB Memory (Scan to
USB) (page 5-37)
x
> Machine Features
Machine Features
The machine is equipped with many useful functions.
Using Various Functions (page 6-1)
Here are some examples.
Optimize your office workflow
Access to frequently used functions
with just one touch (Favorites)
You can preset frequently used functions.
Once you register frequently used
settings as favorite, you can call up the
settings easily. Using this favorite brings
the same results even if operated by
another person.
Program (page 5-8)
Scan originals of different sizes at a
time (Mixed Size Originals)
It is useful when preparing conference
materials.
You can set the different sized originals at
one time so you don't need to reset the
originals regardless of size.
Mixed Size Originals (page 6-16)
Scan a large number of originals in
separate batches and produce as one
job (Continuous Scan)
It is useful when preparing many-page
handouts.
When a large number of originals cannot
be placed in the document processor at
one time, the originals can be scanned in
separate batches and then copied or sent
as one job.
Continuous Scan (page 6-17)
Optimize your office workflow Save energy and cost
Send one time with multiple sending
options (Multi Sending)
You can send a same document to the
multiple destinations using a different
method.
You can specify multiple destinations of
different send methods such as E-mail,
SMB, and Fax.
You can reduce your workflow by sending
a job at once.
Sending to Different Types of
Destinations (Multi Sending) (page 5-
25)
Send a FAX from a PC
(Sending FAX from PC)
You can save the paper used for sending
a FAX with this function.
You can send a file to be faxed from the
PC without printing the file, so that you
can reduce the number of pieces of paper
and perform sending jobs efficiently.
FAX Operation Guide
Save energy as needed
(Energy Saver function)
The machine is equipped with Energy
Saver function that automatically
switched into Sleep Mode. You can set
appropriate Energy Saver Recovery
Level depending on the operation.
Energy Saver function (page 2-26)
1~10
1
1~30
1
11~20
11
21~30
21
Off
xi
> Machine Features
Save energy and cost
Use less toner for printing
(EcoPrint)
You can save toner consumption with this
function.
When you only need to check the printed
content, such as a trial print run or
documents for internal confirmation, use
this function to save toner.
Use this function when a high-quality print
is not required.
EcoPrint (page 6-17)
Reduce paper use
(Paper Saving Printing)
You can print originals on both sides of
the paper. You can also print multiple
originals onto one sheet.
Combine (page 6-13)
Duplex (page 6-9)
Skip blank pages when printing
(Skip Blank Page)
When there are blank pages in a scanned
document, this function skips the blank
pages and prints only pages that are not
blank.
Skip Blank Page (page 6-22)
Save energy and cost Strengthen security
Send a FAX to reduce the
communication cost
(FAX Delayed Transmission)
You can reduce the communication cost
with this function.
The communication cost can be reduced
by setting the timer to the time period
during which the communication cost is
low.
FAX Operation Guide
Password-protect a PDF file
(PDF Encryption Functions)
Use the PDF format's password security
options to restrict document viewing,
printing and editing.
PDF Encryption
Functions (page 6-26)
Prevent loss of finished documents
(Private Print)
Temporarily saving print jobs in the main
unit document box and outputting them
when in front of the device can prevent
documents from being taken by others.
Printing Data Saved in the Printer
(page 4-10)
xii
> Machine Features
Strengthen security Use functions more efficiently
Log in by ID card
(Card Authentication)
You can log in simply by touching an ID
card. You don't need to enter your user
name and password.
Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card
Authentication Kit" (page 11-4)
Strengthen security
(Settings for Administrator)
Various functions are available for
administrators to strengthen security.
Strengthening the Security (page 2-
44)
Make the machine quiet
(Quiet Mode)
You can make the machine quiet by
reducing its running noise.ON/OFF
switching by one-touch is possible.
Quiet Mode (page 2-29)
Use functions more efficiently
Install the machine without concerning
the network cables (Wireless Network)
If there is a wireless LAN environment, it
is possible to install the unit without
worrying about the network wiring. In
addition, Wi-Fi Direct, etc. are supported.
Network Setup (page 2-18)
Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 2-24)
Use USB memory
(USB Memory)
It is useful when you need to print
documents outside your office or you
cannot print documents from your PC.
You can print the document from the USB
memory by plugging it directly into the
machine.
Original scanned at the machine can be
saved in the USB memory also.
Printing Documents Stored in
Removable USB Memory (page 5-
35)
Saving Documents to USB Memory
(Scan to USB) (page 5-37)
Specify image file format
(File Format)
You can select the various file formats
when sending/storing images.
File Format (page 6-24)
OK !
xiv
> Color and Image Quality Functions
Color and Image Quality Functions
The machine is equipped with various color and image quality functions. You can adjust the scanned image as desired.
Basic Color Modes
The basic color modes are as follows.
For details, refer to the following:
Color Selection (page 6-19)
Color mode Description
Reference image Reference
page
Before After
Full Color Scans a document in full color. page 6-19
Grayscale Scans a document in grayscale. page 6-19
Black & White Scans a document in black & white. page 6-19
xv
> Color and Image Quality Functions
Adjusting Image Quality and Color
To adjust the image quality or color of an image, use the following functions.
I want to...
Sample image
Function Page
Before After
Adjust the color precisely.
Adjust the density. Density page 6-17
Adjust the color by strengthening
blue or red tones.
Example: Strengthening red
Color Balance page 6-19
Adjust the saturation. Saturation page 6-21
Adjust the image quality precisely
Emphasize or blur the image
outline.
Example: Emphasize the image
outlines
Sharpness page 6-20
Adjust the difference between
dark and light parts of the image.
Contrast page 6-20
Darken or lighten the background
(the area with no texts or images)
of a document.
Example: Lightening the
background
Background Density page 6-21
Adjust the scanned image
Decrease the file size and
produce the characters clearly.
File format
[High Comp. PDF]
page 6-24
xvi
> Guides Provided with the Machine
Guides Provided with the Machine
The following guides are provided with the machine. Refer to each guide as needed.
The contents of the guides are subject to change without notice for the purpose of improvement of machine
performance.
Printed guides
Start using the
machine quickly
Quick Guide
Explains how to use basic functions of the machine, how to use convenient features, how
to perform routine maintenance, and what to do when problems occur.
For safe use of the
machine
Safety Guide
Provides safety and cautionary information for installation environment and use of the
machine. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.
Safety Guide (ECOSYS M5521cdn/ECOSYS M5521cdw)
Indicates the space required for machine installation, and describes the cautionary labels
and other safety information. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.
xvii
> Guides Provided with the Machine
Guides (PDF) on the DVD (Product Library)
Install the following versions of Adobe Reader to view the manuals on the DVD.
Version 8.0 or later
Use the machine
thoughtfully
Operation Guide (This Guide)
Explains how to load paper and perform copy, print and scan operations, and indicates
default settings and other information.
Use the fax functions FAX Operation Guide
Explains how to use the fax function.
Use the ID card Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation Guide
Explains how to perform authentication using the ID card.
Easily register
machine information
and configure settings
Command Center RX User Guide
Explains how to access the machine from a Web browser on your computer to check and
change settings.
Print data from a
computer
Printer Driver User Guide
Explains how to install the printer driver and use the printer function.
Directly print a PDF file KYOCERA Net Direct Print Operation Guide
Explains how to print PDF files without launching Adobe Acrobat or Reader.
Monitor the machine
and printers on the
network
KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide
Explains how to monitor your network printing system (the machine) with KYOCERA Net
Viewer.
Print without using the
printer driver
PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference
Describes the native printer language (PRESCRIBE commands).
PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference
Describes the PRESCRIBE command functions and control for each type of emulation.
Adjust the print or
scan position
Maintenance Menu User Guide
Maintenance Menu provides the explanation on how to configure the print, scan, and other
settings.
xviii
> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Structure of the guide
The Operation Guide contains the following chapters.
Chapter Contents
1Legal and Safety Information Provides precautions regarding use of the machine and trademark information.
2Installing and Setting up the
Machine
Explains part names, cable connections, installation of the software, login, logout, and
other matters related to administration of the machine.
3Preparation before Use Explains preparations and settings that are required in order to use the machine, such
as how to load paper, and create an address book.
4Printing from PC Explains functions that are available when the machine is used as a printer.
5Operation on the Machine Explains the basic procedures for using the machine, such as placing originals, making
copies, sending documents, and using document boxes.
6Using Various Functions Explains convenient functions that are available on the machine.
7Status/Job Cancel Explains how to check the status of a job and the job history, and how to cancel jobs
being printed or waiting to print. Also explains how to check paper and toner levels, how
to check the device status, and how to cancel fax transmission.
8Setup and Registration (System
Menu)
Explains System Menu and how it relates to the operation of the machine.
9User Authentication and
Accounting (User Login, Job
Accounting)
Explains user login and job accounting.
10 Troubleshooting Explains what to do when toner runs out, an error is displayed, or a paper jam or other
problem occurs.
11 Appendix Describes convenient options that are available for the machine. Provides information
on media types and paper sizes, and gives a glossary of terms. Explains how to enter
characters, and lists the specifications of the machine.
xix
> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Conventions Used in This Guide
Adobe Reader XI is used as an example in the explanations below.
Certain items are indicated in this guide by the conventions described below.
NOTE
The items that appear in Adobe Reader vary depending on how it is used. If the Table of Contents or tools do not
appear, refer to Adobe Reader Help.
Convention Description
[Bold] Indicates keys and buttons.
"Regular" Indicates a message or setting.
Click to move from the current page to the previously
displayed page. This is convenient when you want to return
to the page from which you jumped to the current page.
Click an item in the Table of
Contents to jump to the
corresponding page.
CAUTION
Indicates that personal injury or
mechanical damage may result
from insufficient attention to or
incorrect compliance with the
related points.
NOTE
Indicates supplemental
explanations and reference
information for operations.
IMPORTANT
Indicates operational requirements
and restrictions to operate the
machine correctly, and avoid
damage to the machine or property.
Refer to
Click the underlined text to jump to
the corresponding page.
xx
> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Conventions used in procedures for operating the machine
In this Operation Guide, continuous operation is as follows:
Size and Orientation of Paper
Paper sizes such as A5 and Statement can be used in both the horizontal and vertical orientations. To distinguish the
orientations when these sizes are used, "R" is added to sizes used in the vertical orientation. In addition, the following
icons are used to indicate paper placement orientations on the message display.
Actual procedure Procedure indicated in this guide
Select the [System Menu/Counter] key.
Select the [▲] or [] key to select [Common settings].
Select the [OK] key.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [Common
Settings] > [OK] key
Orientation Setting Position
(X=Length, Y=Width)
Icons on the
message display
Indicated size in this
Guide*1
*1 Paper sizes that can be used vary depending on the function and source tray. For details, refer to the following.
Specifications (page 11-21)
Vertical
orientation (-R)
Cassette A5-R, Statement-R
Multipurpose
tray
A5-R, Statement-R
Horizontal
orientation
Cassette A5
Multipurpose
tray
A5, Statement
xxi
> Menu Map
Menu Map
This is a list of menus displayed on the message display. Depending on the settings, some menus may not be displayed.
Some menu names may differ from their reference titles.
Paper Selection (page 6-8)
Collate (page 6-9)
Duplex (page 6-9)
Zoom (page 6-11)
Combine (page 6-13)
Original Size (page 6-15)
Orig.Orientation (page 6-15)
Mixed Size Orig. (page 6-16)
Original Image (page 6-16)
Density (page 6-17)
EcoPrint (page 6-17)
Continuous Scan (page 6-17)
File Name Entry (page 6-18)
JobFinish Notice (page 6-18)
Print Override (page 6-18)
Color Selection (page 6-19)
Color Balance (page 6-19)
Sharpness (page 6-20)
Contrast (page 6-20)
Backgrnd Density (page 6-21)
Saturation (page 6-21)
Skip Blank Page (page 6-22)
xxii
> Menu Map
Me(E-mail) (page 5-26)
E-mail (page 5-15)
Folder(SMB) (page 5-16)
Folder(FTP) (page 5-18)
WSD Scan (page 5-23)
FAX (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Color Selection (page 6-19)
Original Size (page 6-15)
Original Image (page 6-16)
Scan Resolution (page 6-22)
Sending Size (page 6-23)
Zoom (page 6-11)
Orig.Orientation (page 6-15)
Mixed Size Orig. (page 6-16)
Continuous Scan (page 6-17)
File Format (page 6-24)
File Name Entry (page 6-18)
Subject/Body (page 6-28)
JobFinish Notice (page 6-18)
FAX Resolution (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
FAX Delayed TX (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
FAX Direct TX (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
FAX RX Polling (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
FAX TX Report (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Density (page 6-17)
FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-28)
File Separation (page 6-28)
Sharpness (page 6-20)
Contrast (page 6-20)
Backgrnd Density (page 6-21)
Skip Blank Page (page 6-22)
xxiii
> Menu Map
Sub Address Box (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Polling Box (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Job Box Private/Stored (page 4-11)
Quick/Proof (page 4-14)
USB
Memory
Store File Color Selection (page 6-19)
Original Size (page 6-15)
Original Image (page 6-16)
Scan Resolution (page 6-22)
Storing Size (page 6-29)
Zoom (page 6-11)
Orig.Orientation (page 6-15)
Mixed Size Orig. (page 6-16)
Continuous Scan (page 6-17)
File Format (page 6-24)
File Separation (page 6-28)
File Name Entry (page 6-18)
JobFinish Notice (page 6-18)
Density (page 6-17)
Sharpness (page 6-20)
Contrast (page 6-20)
Backgrnd Density (page 6-21)
Skip Blank Page (page 6-22)
(File
Selection)
Print Collate (page 6-9)
Paper Selection (page 6-8)
Duplex (page 6-9)
EcoPrint (page 6-17)
File Name Entry (page 6-18)
JobFinish Notice (page 6-18)
Print Override (page 6-18)
Color Selection (page 6-19)
Encrypted PDF (page 6-29)
JPEG/TIFF Print (page 6-30)
XPS FitTo Page (page 6-30)
xxiv
> Menu Map
Recall program. (page 5-8)
Print Job Status (page 7-4)
Send Job Status (page 7-5)
Store Job Status (page 7-6)
Scheduled Job (page 7-7)
Print Job Log (page 7-10)
Send Job Log (page 7-11)
Store Job Log (page 7-12)
FAX Job Log (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Scanner (page 7-14)
Printer (page 7-14)
FAX (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Toner Status (page 7-15)
Paper Status (page 7-15)
USB Memory (page 7-14)
USB Keyboard (page 7-14)
Network (page 7-14)
Wi-Fi (page 7-14)
xxv
> Menu Map
Report Report Print Menu Map (page 8-5)
Status Page (page 8-5)
Font List (page 8-5)
Admin Rpt Set. (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Result Rpt Set. (page 8-6)
Job Log History Auto Sending (page 8-6)
Send History (page 8-6)
Destination (page 8-6)
Subject (page 8-6)
Personal Info. (page 8-6)
Counter (page 2-43)
System/Network Network Setting Host Name (page 8-7)
Wi-Fi Direct Set Wi-Fi Direct (page 8-7)
Device Name (page 8-7)
IP Address (page 8-7)
Auto Disconnect (page 8-7)
Wi-Fi Settings Wi-Fi (page 8-8)
Setup (page 8-8)
TCP/IP Settings (page 8-10)
Restart Network (page 8-11)
Wired Netwk. Set TCP/IP Settings (page 8-11)
LAN Interface (page 8-11)
Bonjour (page 8-12)
IPSec (page 8-12)
ProtocolSettings (page 8-12)
Secure Settings (page 8-16)
Ping (page 8-16)
Restart Network (page 8-16)
Primary Network (page 8-16)
I/F Block Set. USB Host (page 8-17)
USB Device (page 8-17)
USB Storage (page 8-17)
Security Level (page 8-17)
xxvi
> Menu Map
System/Network Restart (page 8-17)
Op Functions (page 8-17)
User/Job Account User Login Set. User Login (page 9-3)
Local User List (page 9-6)
Account Lockout (page 9-5)
ID Card Setting Key Login (page 9-19)
Additional Auth. (page 9-19)
Group Auth. (page 9-14)
Guest Auth. Set. (page 9-15)
PIN Login (page 9-20)
NW User Property (page 9-18)
Job Account.Set. Job Accounting (page 9-23)
AccountingAccess (page 9-24)
Account. Report (page 9-36)
Total Accounting (page 9-35)
Each Job Account (page 9-35)
Account. List (page 9-25)
Default Setting Apply Limit (page 9-34)
Copy/Print Count (page 9-34)
Counter Limit (page 9-34)
Unknown User Unknown ID Job (page 9-38)
User Property (page 9-39)
User Property (page 9-9)
Common Settings Language (page 8-19)
Default Screen (page 8-19)
Sound Buzzer (page 8-19)
FAX Speaker (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
FAX Monitor (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Display Bright. (page 8-19)
xxvii
> Menu Map
Common Settings Orig./Paper Set. Custom Orig.Size (page 8-20)
Detect Orig.(DP) (page 8-20)
Def. Orig. Size (page 8-20)
Custom PaperSize (page 8-21)
Cassette 1 Set. Cassette 1 Size (page 8-23)
Cassette 1 Type (page 8-23)
Cassette 2 Set. Cassette 2 Size (page 8-23)
Cassette 2 Type (page 8-23)
MP Tray Set. MP Tray Size (page 8-23)
MP Tray Type (page 8-23)
Media Type Set. (page 8-21)
Media for Auto Full Color (page 8-21)
Black & White (page 8-21)
Def. PaperSource (page 8-22)
SpcialPaper Act. (page 8-22)
Paper Setup Msg (page 8-22)
Preset Limit (page 8-24)
Measurement (page 8-24)
Error Handling DuplexPaperError (page 8-25)
PaperMismatchErr (page 8-25)
Date Setting Date/Time (page 8-25)
Date Format (page 8-25)
Time Zone (page 8-25)
Summer Time (page 8-25)
Timer Setting Auto Panel Reset (page 8-26)
PanelReset Timer (page 8-26)
Sleep Level (models except for Europe) (page 8-26)
Sleep Rules (models for Europe) (page 8-26)
Sleep Timer (page 8-26)
Power Off Rule (models for Europe) (page 8-27)
Power Off Timer (models for Europe) (page 8-27)
Auto Err. Clear (page 8-27)
Err. Clear Timer (page 8-27)
Unusable Time (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Ping Timeout (page 8-27)
xxviii
> Menu Map
Common Settings Function Default Color Selection (page 8-28)
Scan Resolution (page 8-28)
FAX Resolution (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Orig.Image(Copy) (page 8-28)
Orig.Image(Send) (page 8-28)
Zoom (page 8-28)
Collate (page 8-28)
Orig.Orientation (page 8-28)
Backgrnd(Copy) (page 8-28)
Backgrnd(Send) (page 8-28)
EcoPrint (page 8-28)
Skip Blank(Copy) (page 8-28)
Skip Blank(Send) (page 8-28)
File Name Entry (page 8-28)
Subject/Body (page 8-28)
Con.scan-Copy (page 8-29)
Con.scan-FAX (page 8-29)
Con.scan-Others (page 8-29)
File Format (page 8-29)
File Separation (page 8-29)
JPEG/TIFF Print (page 8-29)
XPS FitTo Page (page 8-29)
Detail Setting 2 in 1 Layout (page 8-29)
4 in 1 Layout (page 8-29)
Border Line (page 8-29)
Finish. Binding (page 8-29)
Image Quality (page 8-29)
Color TIFF Comp. (page 8-29)
PDF/A (page 8-29)
High Comp.PDF (page 8-29)
Black Lvl(Copy) (page 8-29)
Black Lvl(Send) (page 8-29)
Login Operation (page 8-30)
RAM Disk Mode (page 8-30)
Format SD Card (page 8-30)
xxix
> Menu Map
Common Settings Optional Memory (page 8-30)
Disp. Status/Log (page 8-31)
USB KeyboardType (page 8-31)
Low Toner Alert (page 8-31)
Color Toner Empty (page 8-31)
Show PowerOffMsg (page 8-31)
EnergySaver Set. Recovery Level (page 8-32)
Copy Paper Selection (page 8-32)
AutoPaperSelect. (page 8-32)
Auto % Priority (page 8-32)
DP Read Action (page 8-32)
Platen Scan Act. (page 8-32)
Select Key Set. (page 8-32)
Printer Emulation Set. (page 8-33)
Color Setting (page 8-33)
EcoPrint (page 8-33)
Override A4/LTR (page 8-33)
Duplex (page 8-33)
Copies (page 8-33)
Orientation (page 8-33)
Gloss Mode (page 8-33)
Wide A4 (page 8-33)
FormFeed TimeOut (page 8-34)
LF Action (page 8-34)
CR Action (page 8-34)
Job Name (page 8-34)
User Name (page 8-34)
MP Tray Priority (page 8-34)
Paper Feed Mode (page 8-34)
Auto Cass. Change (page 8-34)
Resolution (page 8-34)
Send Select Key Set. (page 8-35)
DestinationCheck (page 8-35)
New Dest. Entry (page 8-35)
Recall Dest. (page 8-35)
Default Screen (page 8-35)
Send and Forward (page 8-35)
FAX (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
xxx
> Menu Map
Document Box Sub Address Box (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Job Box Quick Copy Jobs (page 8-36)
JobRet. Deletion (page 8-36)
Polling Box (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Select Key Set. (page 8-32)
Edit Destination Address Book (page 8-37)
Print List (page 8-37)
Addr Book Defaults (page 8-37)
Adjust/Maint. Copy Denst. Adj. (page 8-38)
Send/Box Density (page 8-38)
Contrast (Copy) (page 8-38)
Contrast (Send) (page 8-38)
ColorCalibration (page 8-38)
Color Regist. (page 8-38)
Correct. Bk Line (page 8-38)
Service Setting (page 8-38)
1-1
1 Legal and Safety
Information
Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on the following topics.
Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Safety Conventions in This Guide ........................................................................................................... 1-2
Environment ............................................................................................................................................. 1-3
Precautions for Use ................................................................................................................................. 1-4
Laser Safety (Europe) .............................................................................................................................. 1-5
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) .......................................................................................................... 1-6
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ..................................................................... 1-7
Compliance and Conformity .................................................................................................................... 1-7
Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) .................................................................. 1-7
Warranty (the United States and Canada) ............................................................................................... 1-8
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning ................................................................................................... 1-9
EN ISO 7779 ............................................................................................................................................ 1-9
EK1-ITB 2000 .......................................................................................................................................... 1-9
Wireless Connection (Mexico only) ......................................................................................................... 1-9
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) ................................................................ 1-9
Limited Use of This Product (If equipped) ............................................................................................. 1-10
Legal Information .................................................................................................................................... 1-11
Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................................................ 1-17
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function .......................................................................................................... 1-17
Resource Saving - Paper ....................................................................................................................... 1-17
Environmental benefits of "Power Management" ................................................................................... 1-17
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program .............................................................................................. 1-17
1-2
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Notice
Safety Conventions in This Guide
The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user,
other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their
meanings are indicated below.
WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient
attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from
insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
Symbols
The symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated
inside the symbol.
... [General warning]
... [Warning of high temperature]
The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited
action are indicated inside the symbol.
... [Warning of prohibited action]
... [Disassembly prohibited]
The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics of
the required action are indicated inside the symbol.
... [Alert of required action]
... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]
... [Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection]
Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are
illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).
NOTE
An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this
machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.
1-3
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Environment
The service environmental conditions are as follows:
Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.
• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.
• Avoid locations with vibrations.
• Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.
• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.
• Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged.
During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health. If, however, the
machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of
prints, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that
the room be properly ventilated.
Temperature 50 to 90.5°F (10 to 32.5°C)
Humidity 10 to 80%
1-4
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Precautions for Use
Cautions when handling consumables
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
Keep parts which contain toner out of the reach of children.
If toner happens to spill from parts which contain toner, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes
and skin.
• If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If
coughing develops, contact a physician.
• If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of
your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.
• If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining tenderness,
contact a physician.
• If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.
Do not attempt to force open or destroy parts which contain toner.
Other precautions
Return the exhausted toner container to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container will be
recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.
Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40°C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and
humidity.
If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multipurpose
(MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.
1-5
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Laser Safety (Europe)
Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this machine is
hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the product by user, no
radiation can leak from the machine.
This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC/EN 60825-1:2014.
Regarding CLASS 1 laser products, information is provided on the rating label.
1-6
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA)
1. Safety of laser beam
This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards
established by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the product is
safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. The laser optical system, enclosed in a protective housing and
sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser beam to escape.
2. The CDRH Act
A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health
(CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U.S. without
certification, and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976. The label shown below indicates
compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States. The
position of the rating label is show below.
3. Maintenance
For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.
4. Safety switch
The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened.
ECOSYS xxxxxxxx
1-7
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of
Power
Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and
are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.
Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l'appareil hors tension. Les interrupteurs
sur l'appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas l'appareil hors tension.
Compliance and Conformity
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of
the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
• The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited.
CAUTION — The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all
persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other transmitter.
* The above statements are valid only in the United States of America and Canada.
NOTE — Use shielded interface cables.
Other precautions
(for users in California, the United States)
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
1-8
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Warranty (the United States and Canada)
ECOSYS M5521cdn / ECOSYS M5521cdw
COLOR MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT LIMITED WARRANTY
KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. and KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.
(both referred to as "KYOCERA") warrant the Customer's new Color Multifunctional Product
(referred to as "MFP"), and the new accessories installed with the initial installation of the MFP,
against any defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year, or 200,000 copies/prints
from date of installation, whichever first occurs. In the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be
defective within the warranty period, KYOCERA's only obligation and the Customer's exclusive
remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts. KYOCERA shall have no obligation to furnish
labor.
This warranty is valid only for the original retail purchaser (referred to as the "Customer") of a new
KYOCERA MFP in the United States of America or Canada, based upon the country of purchase.
In order to obtain performance of this warranty, the Customer must immediately notify the
Authorized KYOCERA Dealer from whom the product was purchased. If the KYOCERA Dealer is
not able to provide service, write to KYOCERA at the address below for the name and address of
the Authorized KYOCERA Dealer in your area, or check KYOCERA's website at
www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com for KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. or
www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.ca for KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.
This warranty does not cover MFPs or accessories which: (a) have become damaged due to
operator negligence, misuse, accidents, improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress,
(b) have used parts or supplies which are not genuine KYOCERA brand parts or supplies, (c) have
been installed or serviced by a technician not employed by KYOCERA or an Authorized KYOCERA
Dealer, or (d) have had the serial number modified, altered, or removed.
This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights. The Customer may also have other rights,
which vary from state to state, or province to province. Neither the seller, nor any other person, is
authorized to extend the time period or expand this warranty on behalf of KYOCERA.
THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO, AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR, ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF
THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, THE MFP.
KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.
6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8,
Canada
KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc.
225 Sand Road,
Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA
1-9
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning
It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.
Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low. It may not be limited to these items. Do
not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/scanned.
• Paper money
• Bank note
• Securities
•Stamp
• Passport
• Certificate
Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.
EN ISO 7779
Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV, 06.01.2004: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB (A) oder
weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779.
EK1-ITB 2000
Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um
störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld
platziert werden.
Wireless Connection (Mexico only)
The operation of this equipment is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) it is possible that this equipment or device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this equipment or device must
accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:
(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe
aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN
(If equipped)
Wireless LAN allows information to be exchanged between wireless access points instead of using a network cable,
which offers the advantage that a LAN connection can be established freely within an area in which radio waves can be
transmitted.
On the other hand, the following problems may occur if security settings are not configured, because radio waves can
pass through obstacles (including walls) and reach everywhere within a certain area.
Secretly Viewing Communication Contents
A third person with malicious objectives may intentionally monitor radio waves and gain unauthorized access to the
following communication contents.
• Personal information including ID, passwords, and credit card numbers
• Contents of email messages
1-10
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Illegal Intrusion
A third party with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to personal or company networks and conduct the
following illegal actions.
• Extracting personal and confidential information (information leak)
• Entering into communication while impersonating a specific person and distributing unauthorized information
(spoofing)
• Modifying and retransmitting intercepted communications (falsification)
• Transmitting computer viruses and destroying data and systems (destruction)
Wireless LAN cards and wireless access points contain built-in security mechanisms to address these problems and to
reduce the possibility of these problems occurring by configuring the security settings of wireless LAN products when
the product is used.
We recommend that customers take responsibility and use their judgment when configuring the security settings and
that they ensure that they fully understand the problems that can occur when the product is used without configuring the
security settings.
Limited Use of This Product (If equipped)
• Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect medical equipment. When using this product in a medical
institution or in the vicinity of medical instruments, either use this product according to the instructions and
precautions provided by the administrator of the institution or those provided on the medical instruments.
• Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect automatic control equipment including automatic doors and fire
alarms. When using this product in the vicinity of the automatic control equipment, use this product according to the
instructions and precautions provided on the automatic control equipment.
• If this product is used in devices that are directly related to service including airplanes, trains, ships, and automobiles
or this product is used in applications requiring high reliability and safety to function and in devices requiring accuracy
including those used in disaster prevention and crime prevention and those used for various safety purposes, please
use this product after considering the safety design of the entire system including adoption of a failsafe design and
redundancy design for reliability and safety maintenance of the entire system. This product is not intended for use in
applications requiring high reliability and safety including aerospace instruments, trunk communication equipment,
nuclear power control equipment, and medical equipment; hence, the decision as to whether to use this product in
these applications needs to be fully considered and determined.
1-11
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Legal Information
Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of KYOCERA Document
Solutions Inc. is prohibited.
Regarding Trade Names
• PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are registered trademark of Kyocera Corporation.
• KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows 7,
Windows Server 2012, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10 and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.
• PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
• Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
• IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• AppleTalk, Bonjour, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging
Inc.
• Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH.
• ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of
International Typeface Corporation.
• ThinPrint is a trademark of Cortado AG in Germany and other countries.
• UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.
• This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.
• iPad, iPhone and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
• iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license by
Apple Inc.
• Google and Google Cloud Print™ are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Google Inc.
• Mopria™ is registered trademarks of Mopria™ Alliance.
• Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.
All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. The
designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide.
1-12
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
GPL/LGPL
This product contains GPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html) and/or LGPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.html)
software as part of its firmware. You can get the source code, and you are permitted to copy, redistribute and modify it
under the terms of GPL/LGPL. For further information including availability of the source code, visit
http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com/gpl/.
OpenSSL License
Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without prior written permission.
For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without
prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software
developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so
as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The
following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the
SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the
holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the
package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1-13
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:
"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must
include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e.
this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
Monotype Imaging License Agreement
1Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as
well as the UFST Software.
2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and
versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or
personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. Under the terms of
this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. If you need to have access to the
fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from
Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights
are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.
3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary
information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access
to and use of the Software and Typefaces.
4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup copy. You
agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original.
5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated. This License
may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not
remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this License expires or is terminated, you
shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as
requested.
6 You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software.
7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with
Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship.
Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions.
The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular
purpose and merchantability, are excluded.
8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is
repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.
In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or consequential
damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces.
9Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.
1-14
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written
consent of Monotype Imaging.
11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data
and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate.
Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in
FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).
12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and
conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. No
change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party.
By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
Knopflerfish License
This product includes software developed by the Knopflerfish Project.
http://www.knopflerfish.org
Copyright 2003-2010 The Knopflerfish Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- Neither the name of the KNOPFLERFISH project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Apache License (Version 2.0)
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1
through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are
under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or
indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of
fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source
code, documentation source, and configuration files.
1-15
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including
but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as
indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix
below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the
Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an
original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain
separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or
additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work
by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For
the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the
Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code
control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of
discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise
designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been
received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to
You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce,
prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such
Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a
perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent
license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license
applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their
Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was
submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit)
alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent
infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date
such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with
or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:
(a)You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
(b)You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
(c)You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark,
and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of
the Derivative Works; and
(d)If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute
must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices
that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text
file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the
Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices
normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the
License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an
addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be
construed as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license
terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as
a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated
in this License.
1-16
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for
inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any
additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any
separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product
names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and
reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and
each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE,
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely
responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated
with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or
otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing,
shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential
damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including
but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other
commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose
to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights
consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on
Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold
each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your
accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work.
To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets
"[]" replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the
appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of
purpose be included on the same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party
archives.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the
License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS
IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for
the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.
1-17
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Energy Saving Control Function
The device comes equipped with a Sleep where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state but power
consumption is reduced to a minimum after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used. If the
machine is not used while in sleep mode, the power automatically turns off.
Sleep (page 2-26)
Power Off Rule (models for Europe) (page 2-28)
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function
This device includes 2-sided printing as a standard function. For example, by printing two 1-sided originals onto a single
sheet of paper as a 2-sided print, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used.
Duplex (page 6-9)
Printing in duplex mode reduces paper consumption and contributes to the conservation of forest resources. Duplex
mode also reduces the amount of paper that must be purchased, and thereby reduces cost. It is recommended that
machines capable of duplex printing be set to use duplex mode by default.
Resource Saving - Paper
For the preservation and sustainable use of forest resources, it is recommended that recycled as well as virgin paper
certified under environmental stewardship initiatives or carrying recognised ecolabels, which meet EN 12281:2002* or
an equivalent quality standard, be used.
This machine also supports printing on 64 g/m2 paper. Using such paper containing less raw materials can lead to
further saving of forest resources.
* : EN12281:2002 "Printing and business paper - Requirements for copy paper for dry toner imaging processes"
Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types.
Environmental benefits of "Power Management"
To reduce power consumption when idle, this machine is equipped with a power management function that
automatically activates energy-saving mode when the machine is idle for a certain period of time.
Although it takes the machine a slight amount of time to return to READY mode when in energy-saving mode, a
significant reduction in energy consumption is possible. It is recommended that the machine be used with the activation
time for energy-saving mode set to the default setting.
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program
We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that this
product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program.
ENERGY STAR® is a voluntary energy efficiency program with the goal of developing and promoting the
use of products with high energy efficiency in order to help prevent global warming. By purchasing
ENERGY STAR® qualified products, customers can help reduce emissions of greenhouse gases during
product use and cut energy-related costs.
2-1
2 Installing and Setting
up the Machine
This chapter provides information for the administrator of this machine, such as part names, cable connection, and
software installation.
Part Names (Machine Exterior) ..................... 2-2
Part Names (Connectors/Interior) ................. 2-4
Part Names (With Optional Equipments
Attached) ....................................................... 2-6
Connecting the Machine and Other
Devices ......................................................... 2-7
Connecting Cables ........................................ 2-8
Connecting LAN Cable ....................... 2-8
Connecting USB Cable ....................... 2-9
Connecting the Power Cable .............. 2-9
Power On/Off .............................................. 2-10
Power On .......................................... 2-10
Power Off .......................................... 2-10
Using the Operation Panel ........................... 2-11
Operation Panel Keys ........................ 2-11
Operation Method ............................. 2-13
Check the original and paper settings 2-14
Help Screen ...................................... 2-14
Login/Logout ............................................... 2-15
Login ................................................. 2-15
Logout ............................................... 2-16
Default Settings of the Machine .................. 2-17
Setting Date and Time ...................... 2-17
Network Setup ............................................ 2-18
Configuring the Wired Network ......... 2-18
Configuring the Wireless Network .... 2-20
Setting Wi-Fi Direct ........................... 2-24
Energy Saver function ................................. 2-26
Sleep ................................................. 2-26
Auto Sleep ........................................ 2-27
Sleep Rules (models for Europe) ...... 2-27
Sleep Level (Energy Saver and
Quick Recovery) (models except for
Europe) ............................................. 2-28
Power Off Rule (models for
Europe) ............................................. 2-28
Quiet Mode ................................................. 2-29
Installing Software ....................................... 2-30
Software on DVD (Windows) ............ 2-30
Installing Software in Windows ......... 2-31
Uninstalling the Software .................. 2-37
Installing Software
in Mac Computer .............................. 2-38
Setting TWAIN Driver ........................ 2-40
Setting WIA Driver ............................ 2-42
Checking the Counter ................................. 2-43
Additional Preparations for
the Administrator ......................................... 2-44
Sending Documents to a PC ............. 2-44
Strengthening the Security ................ 2-44
Command Center RX .................................. 2-45
Accessing Command
Center RX ......................................... 2-46
Changing Security Settings .............. 2-47
Changing Device Information ........... 2-49
E-mail Settings .................................. 2-51
Registering Destinations ................... 2-55
Transferring Data from Our Other
Products ...................................................... 2-56
Migrating the Address Book .............. 2-56
2-2
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)
Part Names (Machine Exterior)
1 Document Processor
2 Inner Tray
3 Paper Stopper
4 Cassette 1
5 Power Switch
6 Button (Right Cover Open)
7 USB Memory Slot
8 Right Cover
9 Original Stopper
10 Original Eject Table
11 Original Table
12 Original Width Guides
13 Slit Glass
14 Handles
15 Operation Panel
16 Platen
17 Original Size Indicator Plates
9
12 11 10
5
6
3
4
2
1
7
8
13 17
16
14
15
2-3
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)
18 Handles
19 Anti-theft Lock Slot
20 Rear Cover 1
18
20
19
2-4
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Connectors/Interior)
Part Names (Connectors/Interior)
1 TEL Connector
2 LINE Connector
3 USB Interface Connector
4 Network Interface Connector
5 Feed Cover
6 Paper Length Guide
7 Paper Width Guides
8 Multipurpose Tray
9 Tray Extension
10 Paper Width Guides
11 Fuser Cover
11
10
6
1 2
3
4
5
78 9
2-5
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Connectors/Interior)
12 Toner Container (Yellow)
13 Toner Container (Cyan)
14 Toner Container (Magenta)
15 Toner Container (Black)
16 Toner Container Lock Lever
16
1213 1415
2-7
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting the Machine and Other Devices
Connecting the Machine and Other Devices
Prepare the cables necessary to suit the environment and purpose of the machine use.
When Connecting the Machine to the PC via USB
When Connecting the Machine to the PC or Tablet by network cable, Wi-Fi, or Wi-Fi direct
Cables that Can Be Used
NOTE
If you are using wireless LAN, refer to the following.
Configuring the Wireless Network (page 2-20)
Connection Environment Function Necessary Cable
Connect a LAN cable to the
machine.
Printer/Scanner/Network FAX LAN cable (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,
1000BASE-T)
Connect a USB cable to the
machine.
Printer/Scanner (TWAIN/WIA) USB 2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB
compliant, max. 5.0 m, shielded)
IMPORTANT
Using a cable other than a USB 2.0 compatible cable may cause failure.
USB
Tablet
Network cable
connection
Network
Wi-Fi access point
Wi-Fi
connection*1
Wi-Fi Direct
connection*1
*1 Only for models with Wi-Fi.
2-8
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables
Connecting Cables
Connecting LAN Cable
1Connect the cable to the machine.
1Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.
2Connect the other end of the cable to the hub or the PC.
2Power on the machine and configure the network.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that the power to the machine is turned off.
Power Off (page 2-10)
Network Setup (page 2-18)
2-9
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables
Connecting USB Cable
1Connect the cable to the machine.
1Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector.
2Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.
2Power on the machine.
Connecting the Power Cable
1Connect the cable to the machine.
Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power
outlet.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that the power to the machine is turned off.
Power Off (page 2-10)
IMPORTANT
Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.
NOTE
When connecting the power cord to this machine, the message display may be displayed
momentarily.
2-10
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Power On/Off
Power On/Off
Power On
1Turn the power switch on.
Power Off
1Turn the power switch off.
The confirmation message for power supply off is displayed when [Show PowerOffMsg] is
set to [On].
It takes about 3 minutes for power off.
Show PowerOffMsg (page 8-31)
CAUTION
If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the power switch. If the
machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the
outlet as a safety precaution.
IMPORTANT
• If using the products equipped with the fax function, note that turning the machine off at the power switch
disables fax transmission and reception.
• Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.
2-11
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel
Using the Operation Panel
Operation Panel Keys
1[Status/Job Cancel] key: Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen.
2[Document Box/USB] key: Displays the Document Box/USB screen.
3[System Menu/Counter] key: Displays the System Menu/Counter screen.
4[FAX] key: Displays the FAX screen.
5[Send] key: Displays the screen for sending. You can change it to display the Address Book screen.
6 One Touch keys: Recalls the destination registered for One Touch Keys.
7[Wi-Fi] indicator*1: Blinks during Wi-Fi connection.
8[Black&White] key: Selects black and white mode.
9[Full Color] key: Selects full color mode.
10 Select keys: Selects the menu displayed at the bottom of the message display.
11 [Processing] indicator: Blinks while printing or sending/receiving.
12 [Memory] indicator: Blinks while the machine is accessing the machine memory or fax memory.
13 Message display: Displays the setting menu, machine status, and error messages.
14 [Wi-Fi Direct] key*1: Set Wi-Fi Direct, and show information necessary for connection and the connection status.
15 [On Hook] key: Switches between on-hook and off-hook when manually sending a FAX.
16 [Confirm/Add Destination] key: Confirms the destination or adds a destination.
17 [Address Recall/Pause] key: Calls the previous destination. Also used to enter a pause when entering a FAX
number.
18 [Address Book] key: Displays the Address Book screen.
19 [Copy] key: Displays the Copy screen.
*1 Only for models with Wi-Fi.
1
3 4 6 7 11 12
17 16 15 1418 13
10892
19
5
2-12
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel
20 [Function Menu] key: Displays the function menu screen.
21 [Back] key: Returns to the previous display.
22 [Attention] indicator: Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped.
23 Arrow keys: Increments or decrements numbers, or selects menu in the message display. In addition, moves the
cursor when entering the characters.
24 [OK] key: Finalizes a function or menu, and numbers that have been entered.
25 Numeric keys: Enter numbers and symbols.
26 [Stop] key: Cancels or pauses the job in progress.
27 [Start] key: Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations.
28 [Quiet Mode] key: Lower print speed for quiet processing.
29 [Authentication/Logout] key: Authenticates user, and exits the operation for the current user (i.e. log out).
30 [Energy Saver] key: Puts the machine into Sleep Mode. Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode.
31 Program keys: Used to register or recall programs.
32 [Reset] key: Returns settings to their default states.
33 [Clear] key: Clears entered numbers and characters.
20
22 23, 24 25 27 28 2921 26
30313233
2-13
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel
Operation Method
This section explains how to operate the setting menus on the message display.
Displaying the Menus and Configuring Settings
Select the [System Menu/Counter] key or [Function Menu] key to display the setting menus. Select the [▲] key, [▼]
key, [◄] key, [►] key, [OK] key, or [Back] key to select a menu, and perform settings.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
User/Job Account
Exit
04
User Property
05
Common Settings
06
Language:
English
01
Deutsch
02
Francais
03
*
Language:
English
01
Deutsch
02
Francais
03
*
Common Settings:
Language
Exit
01
Default Screen
02
Sound
03
Sys. Menu/Count.:
System/Network
Exit
03
Counter
02
01 Report
Select the [System Menu/Counter] key or
[Function Menu] key to display the setting
menus.
The directions of usable arrow
keys are shown on the screen
displayed.
When the [▲] or [▼] key is
selected, the selection moves
line by line.
When the [◄] or [►] key is
selected, the selection moves in
units of one page.
When [OK] is displayed, select
the [OK] key to confirm the
selection.
Select the [OK] key to display
the selected menu.
The selected item is displayed with
[*] (asterisk) at the beginning.
Select the [OK] key to confirm
the selected setting.
When the [▲] or [▼] key is
selected, the selection moves
line by line.
Select the [Back] key to return to
the screen one level higher.
Setting menus
Normal screen
Exiting the menu operation
When [Exit] is displayed, select [Exit] to exit
the setting menu and return to the normal
screen.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
System/Network
Exit
03
Counter
02
01 Report
Ready to copy.
A4 A4
1
Zoom Paper
Copies
100%
:
2-14
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel
Check the original and paper settings
The current original and paper settings are displayed.
The copy screen is used here as an example.
Help Screen
If you have difficulty operating the machine, you can check how to operate it using the operation panel.
When [Help] is displayed on the message display, select [Help] to display the Help screen. The Help screen shows
machine operation.
Select the [▼] key to display the next step or select the [▲] key to display the previous step.
Select the [OK] key to exit the Help screen.
NOTE
• You can select the [Function Menu] key to configure original and paper settings.
Paper Selection (page 6-8)
Original Size (page 6-15)
Original Orientation (page 6-15)
• You can register frequently used functions in Select keys.
Select Key Set. (page 8-32)
Select Key Set. (page 8-35)
Ready to copy.
A4 A4
1
Zoom Paper
Copies
100%
:
1 Original size
2 Original orientation
3 Paper source
4 Paper size
5 Paper orientation
15
2
3
4
Ready to copy.
A4 A4
1
Zoom Paper
Copies
100%
:
6[Function Menu] key
7 Select keys
6
7
Paper
jammed in
Cassette 1.
Help
JAM****
CorrectiveAction:
Detach Cassette 1.
Remove paper jam.
Reattach Cassette 1.
OK
2-15
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout
Login/Logout
If you are setting a function that requires administrator rights, or if user login administration is enabled, you must enter
your login user name and login password.
Login
1Enter the login user name.
1If the login screen is displayed during operations, select "Login User Name" and select the
[OK] key.
2Enter the login user name using the numeric keys and select the [OK] key.
2Enter the login password.
1Select "Login Password" and select the [OK] key.
2Enter the login password and select the [OK] key.
3Select [Login].
NOTE
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, login with administrator
privileges and change your login user name or login password.
NOTE
• If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, [Menu] is
displayed. Select [Menu] and select [Login Type] and then it is possible to select the
authentication destination as [Local Authentic.] or [Netwk Authentic.].
•Select [Menu] and select [Domain] and then it is possible to select from the domains
registered.
NOTE
If Login Operation is [Select Character], then the screen is displayed to enter details by
selecting from the characters on the message display.
Function Defaults (page 8-28)
Character Entry Method (page 11-8)
Character Entry Method (page 11-8)
2-16
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout
Logout
To logout from the machine, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the login user
name/login password entry screen.
Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances:
• When the machine enters the sleep state.
• When the auto panel reset function is activated.
2-17
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Default Settings of the Machine
Before using this machine, configure such settings as date and time, network configuration, and energy saving functions
as needed.
Setting Date and Time
Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.
When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of
the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used.
1Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >
[Date Setting] > [OK] key
2Configure the settings.
[▲] [▼] key > [Time Zone] > [OK] key > Select the time zone > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >
[Date/Time] > [OK] key > Set the date/time > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Date Format] >
[OK] key > Select the Date Format > [OK] key
NOTE
The default settings of the machine can be changed in System Menu.
For settings that are configurable from System Menu, refer to the following:
Setup and Registration (System Menu) (page 8-1)
NOTE
• If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and
password, and select [Login].
• The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
• Be sure to set the time difference before setting the date and time.
• The correct time can be periodically set by obtaining the time from the network time server.
Command Center RX User Guide
Item Description
Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from
the list. If you select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings
for summer time.
Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you
perform Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on
the header.
Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31),
Hour (00 to 23), Minute (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)
Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed
in Western notation.
Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day
NOTE
Select the [▲] or [▼] key to enter a number.
Select the [◄] or [►] key to move the position being entered, which is shown highlighted.
2-18
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
Network Setup
Configuring the Wired Network
The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4),
TCP/IP (IPv6), NetBEUI, and IPSec. It enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX and other platforms.
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network.
Be sure to connect the network cable before configuring the settings.
Connecting LAN Cable (page 2-8)
For other network settings, refer to the following:
Network Setting (page 8-7)
IPv4 setting
1Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Wired Netwk. Set] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[TCP/IP Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [IPv4 Setting] > [OK] key
2Configure the settings.
When setting the static IP address
1[▲] [] key > [DHCP] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Off] > [OK] key
2[▲] [] key > [IP Address] > [OK] key
3Set the IP address.
4Select the [OK] key.
5[▲] [] key > [Subnet Mask] > [OK] key
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and
password, and select [Login].
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
NOTE
You can set any value between 000 and 255.
Use the numeric keys or select the [▲] or [▼] key to enter a number.
Select the [◄] or [►] key to move the position being entered, which is shown highlighted.
2-19
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
6Set the subnet mask.
7Select the [OK] key.
8[▲] [] key > [Default Gateway] > [OK] key
9Set the default gateway.
10Select the [OK] key.
11[▲] [] key > [Auto-IP] > [OK] key
12[Off] > [OK] key
NOTE
You can set any value between 000 and 255.
Use the numeric keys or select the [▲] or [▼] key to enter a number.
Select the [◄] or [►] key to move the position being entered, which is shown highlighted.
NOTE
You can set any value between 000 and 255.
Use the numeric keys or select the [▲] or [▼] key to enter a number.
Select the [◄] or [►] key to move the position being entered, which is shown highlighted.
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network from System Menu, or turn the
machine OFF and then ON.
Restart Network (page 8-16)
NOTE
Ask your network administrator for the IP address in advance, and have it ready when you
configure this setting.
In the following cases, set the IP address of DNS server on the Command Center RX.
• When using the host name with "DHCP" setting set to "Off"
• When using the DNS server with IP address that is not assigned by DHCP automatically.
Setting the IP Address of the DNS Server, refer to the following:
Command Center RX User Guide
2-20
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
Configuring the Wireless Network
When the wireless network function is available on the machine and the connection settings are configured, it is possible
to print or send in a wireless network (wireless LAN) environment. The configuration methods are as follows:
Setting the Connection by Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool
To send the Wi-Fi settings configured in the Wi-Fi Setup Tool to the machine, connect the computer or handheld device
with the machine locally. The connection methods are wired connection via LAN cable and wireless LAN connection (Wi-
Fi Direct).
Wired Connection by Using LAN Cable
1Connect the machine with a computer
1Connect the machine with a computer via LAN cable when the machine is powered on.
2Turn on the computer.
IP address (link local address) of the machine and computer is generated automatically.
Configuration Method Description Reference Page
Configuring the Connection
from the Operation Panel
on This Machine
Use Wi-Fi Settings or Wireless Network to configure
the network in details from System menu.
Wi-Fi Settings (page 8-8)
Setting the Connection by
Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool
This is the tool included in the Product Library. You
can configure the connection according to the
instructions provided by the wizard.
Setting the Connection by
Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool
(page 2-20)
Configuring Connections
on the Web Page
The connection can be set from the Command
Center RX.
Command Center RX User
Guide
NOTE
On a model with a Wi-Fi function, change the settings in "Primary Network" appropriately if you switch to other than a
wired network interface.
Primary Network (page 8-16)
NOTE
• Before using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool, connect your computer to this machine locally with wired LAN cable or Wi-Fi
Direct.
• To use Wi-Fi Direct, confirm that the Wi-Fi Direct is enabled (Wi-Fi Direct is set to [On]) and Restart Network from
the operation panel, before your computer will be connected to this machine with Wi-Fi Direct.
• To use a wired LAN cable directly connected to the machine, the Auto-IP (Link-local) address will be assigned to the
machine and the computer. This machine applies Auto-IP as the default settings.
• Configure the settings on the operation panel if your computer supports WPS.
Wi-Fi Settings (page 8-8)
2-21
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
2Insert the DVD.
3Display the screen.
4Select [Maintenance].
5[Wi-Fi Setup Tool] > [OK]
6Configure the settings.
1[Do not use automatic configuration] > [Next] > [Next]
2[Use LAN cable] > [Next] > [Next]
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select
[Cancel].
• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).
1Click [View License Agreement]
and read the License Agreement.
2Click [Accept].
12
1
2
2-22
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
3[Easy setup] > [Next]
The machine is detected.
4Select the machine > [Next]
5Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter the login user
name and password. Login user name and Password are both Admin.
6Configure the communication settings > [Next]
7Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next]
The network is configured.
Wireless LAN Connection by Using Wi-Fi Direct
1Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Wi-Fi Direct Set] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Wi-Fi Direct] > [OK] key
2Configure the settings.
[▲] [] key > [On] > [OK] key
3Restart the network.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Restart Network] > [OK] key > [Yes]
4Connect a computer or a handheld device with the machine.
5Insert the DVD.
NOTE
• Only one machine can be searched using Wi-Fi Setup Tool. It may take times to search
the machine.
• If the machine is not detected, select [Advanced setup] > [Next]. Select [Express] or
[Custom] as device discovery method and specify the IP address or host name to
search the machine.
Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 2-24)
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select
[Cancel].
• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).
2-23
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
6Display the screen.
7Select [Maintenance].
8[Wi-Fi Setup Tool] > [OK]
9Configure the settings.
1[Do not use automatic configuration] > [Next] > [Next]
2[Wi-Fi Direct] > [Next] > [Next]
3[Advanced setup] > [Next]
Select [Express] or [Custom] as device discovery method and specify the IP address or
host name to search the machine.
4Select the machine > [Next]
5Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter the login user
name and password. Login user name and Password are both Admin.
6Configure the communication settings > [Next]
7Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next]
The network is configured.
1Click [View License Agreement]
and read the License Agreement.
2Click [Accept].
12
1
2
2-24
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
Setting Wi-Fi Direct
When the wireless network function is available on the machine, setting Wi-Fi Direct enables you to print from the Wi-Fi
Direct environment. The configuration methods are as follows:
Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine
Connecting to Computers or Handheld Devices that Support Wi-Fi Direct
1Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Wi-Fi Direct Set] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Wi-Fi Direct] > [OK] key
2Configure the settings.
[▲] [] key > [On] > [OK] key
3Restart the network.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Restart Network] > [OK] key > [Yes]
4Specify the machine name from the computer or handheld
device.
If a confirmation message appears on the operation panel of the machine, select [Yes].
The network between this machine and the handheld device is configured.
Connecting to Computers or Handheld Devices Unsupported Wi-Fi Direct
Here, we'll explain the procedures for connecting to iOS handheld devices.
1Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Wi-Fi Direct Set] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Wi-Fi Direct] > [OK] key
2Configure the settings.
[▲] [] key > [On] > [OK] key
3Restart the network.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Restart Network] > [OK] key > [Yes]
4[Wi-Fi Direct] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Detail Info] > [OK] key
5Note the network name (SSID), IP address, and password.
6Configure the handheld device.
1[Settings] > [Wi-Fi]
2-25
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
2Select the network name (SSID) appeared in step 5 from the list.
3Enter the password that was provided in step 5 > [Connect]
The network between this machine and the handheld device is configured.
Configuring the Connection by Using Push Button
When your computer or handheld device does not support Wi-Fi Direct but supports WPS, you can configure the
network using push button.
1Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Wi-Fi Direct Set] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Wi-Fi Direct] > [OK] key
2Configure the settings.
[▲] [] key > [On] > [OK] key
3Restart the network.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Restart Network] > [OK] key > [Yes]
4[Wi-Fi Direct] key > [▲] [▼] key > [PushButton Setup] > [OK] key
5Press the push button on the computer or handheld device and
select [Push Button] on the screen of operation panel
simultaneously > [Next].
The network between this machine and the computer or handheld device is configured.
IMPORTANT
You can connect up to three handheld devices at the same time using Wi-Fi Direct setting. When the devices
that support Wi-Fi Direct are connected, if you want to connect other device, disconnect the already-
connected devices from the network. The disconnection methods are as follows:
• Disconnect the network from the computer or handheld computer
• Disconnecting all devices from the network on the operation panel
Select [Wi-Fi Direct] key > [▲] [▼] key > [ConnectionStatus] > [OK] key > [Menu] > [▲] [▼] key >
[Disconnect All] > [OK] key
• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the System menu
Wi-Fi Direct Set (page 8-7)
• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the Command Center RX
Command Center RX User Guide
2-26
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver function
Energy Saver function
If a certain period of time elapses after the machine is last used, the machine automatically enters sleep mode, which
minimizes power consumption. If the machine is not used while in sleep mode, the power automatically turns off.
Sleep
To enter Sleep, select the [Energy Saver] key. Message display and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to
save a maximum amount of power except the Energy Saver indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep.
If print data is received during Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.
Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.
To resume, perform the following actions.
• Select the [Energy Saver] key.
Recovery time from Sleep Mode is as follows.
• Within 12 seconds
Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and
password, and select [Login].
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
Energy Saver indicator
2-27
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver function
Auto Sleep
Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time.
The amount of time before entering Sleep is as follows.
• 1 minute (default setting)
To change the preset sleep time, refer to the following:
1Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Timer Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Sleep Timer] > [OK] key
2Set the Sleep time.
1Enter the Sleep time.
2Select the [OK] key.
Sleep Rules (models for Europe)
You can set whether sleep mode operates for each function. When the machine enters sleep mode, the ID card cannot
be recognized.
For more information on Sleep Rules settings, refer to the following:
Sleep Rules (models for Europe) (page 8-26)
1Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Timer Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Sleep Rules] > [OK] key
2Set the Sleep rule.
1Select the function to be set, and select the [OK] key.
[Card Reader] is displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated.
2[▲] [] key > [Off] or [On] > [OK] key
Repeat steps 2-1 to 2-2 to set for a different function.
NOTE
You can set any value below.
• For Europe: 1 to 60 minutes
• Except for Europe: 1 to 240 minutes
Use the numeric keys or select the [▲] or [▼] key to enter a number.
2-28
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver function
Sleep Level (Energy Saver and Quick Recovery)
(models except for Europe)
For sleep level, you can toggle between the following two modes: Energy Saver mode and Quick Recovery mode. The
default setting is Energy Saver mode.
Energy Saver mode reduces power consumption even more than Quick Recovery mode, and allows Sleep Mode to be
set separately for each function. The ID card cannot be recognized.
To resume, select the [Energy Saver] key on the operation panel. If print data is received during Sleep, the machine
automatically wakes up and starts printing.
For more information on Sleep Level settings, refer to the following:
Sleep Level (models except for Europe) (page 8-26)
1Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Timer Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Sleep Level] > [OK] key
2Select the Sleep level.
[▲] [] key > [Quick Recovery] or [Energy Saver] > [OK] key
When [Energy Saver] is set, next go on to set whether or not to use Energy Saver mode for
each function.
3Set the Sleep rule.
1Select the function to be set, and select the [OK] key.
[Card Reader] is displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated.
2[▲] [] key > [Off] or [On] > [OK] key
Repeat steps 3-1 to 3-2 to set for a different function.
Power Off Rule (models for Europe)
The Power Off Rule is used to stop the power from automatically turning off.
The default preset time is 3 days.
For more information on Power Off Rule settings, refer to the following:
Power Off Rule (models for Europe) (page 8-27)
2-29
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quiet Mode
Quiet Mode
Lower print speed for quiet processing. Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable.
When the [
Quiet Mode
] key is selected, the [
Quiet Mode
] key blinks and Quiet Mode is enabled.
NOTE
The processing speed will be slower than normal when in Quiet Mode.
[Quiet Mode] key
2-30
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Installing Software
Install appropriate software on your PC from the included DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of
this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC.
Software on DVD (Windows)
You can use either [
Express Install
] or [
Custom Install
] can be selected for the installation method. [
Express Install
] is
the standard installation method. To install components that cannot be installed by [
Express Install
], use [
Custom Install
].
For details on Custom Installation, refer to the following:
Custom Install (page 2-33)
Software Description Express
Install
KX DRIVER This driver enables files on a computer to be printed by the machine.
Multiple page description languages (PCL XL, KPDL, etc.) are supported by
a single driver. This printer driver allows you to take full advantage of the
features of the machine.
Use this driver to create PDF files.
KX XPS DRIVER This printer driver supports the XPS (XML Paper Specification) format
developed by Microsoft Corporation.
-
KPDL mini-driver/PCL mini-
driver
This is a Microsoft MiniDriver that supports PCL and KPDL. There are some
restrictions on the machine features and option features that can be used
with this driver.
-
FAX Driver This makes it possible to send a document created in a computer software
application as a fax via the machine.
-
Kyocera TWAIN Driver This driver enables scanning on the machine using a TWAIN-compliant
software application.
Kyocera WIA Driver WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition) is a function of Windows that enables
reciprocal communication between an imaging device such as a scanner
and an image processing software application. An image can be acquired
using a WIA-compliant software application, which is convenient when a
TWAIN-compliant software application is not installed in the computer.
-
KYOCERA Net Viewer This is a utility that enables monitoring of the machine on the network. -
Status Monitor This is a utility that monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing
reporting function.
KYOCERA Net Direct Print This makes it possible to print a PDF file without starting Adobe Acrobat/
Reader.
-
FONTS These are display fonts that enable the machine's built-in fonts to be used in
a software application.
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• WIA Driver and KX XPS DRIVER cannot be installed on Windows XP.
2-31
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Installing Software in Windows
Express Install
The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 8.1 using [Express Install].
For details on Custom Installation, refer to the following:
Custom Install (page 2-33)
1Insert the DVD.
2Display the screen.
3Select [Express Install].
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select
[Cancel].
• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).
1Click [View License Agreement]
and read the License Agreement.
2Click [Accept].
12
2-32
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
4Install the software.
You can also select [Use host name for port name] and set to use the host name of the
standard TCP/IP port. (A USB connection cannot be used.)
IMPORTANT
If Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct is enabled, be sure to specify the IP address for the port name.
Installation may fail if the host name is specified.
NOTE
• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the
machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and that it
is turned on and click (Reload).
• If the Windows security window appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].
• To install Status Monitor on Windows versions preceding Windows 8, it is necessary to
install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 beforehand.
3
1
2
2-33
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
5Finish the installation.
When "Your software is ready to use" appears, you can use the software. To print a test
page, click the "Print a test page" checkbox and select the machine.
Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.
If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.
This completes the printer driver installation procedure.
If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the following:
Custom Install
The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 8.1 using [Custom Install].
1Insert the DVD.
NOTE
When you have selected [Device settings] in Windows XP, the dialog box for device setting
will appear after [Finish] is clicked. Configure the settings for options installed on the
machine. Device settings can be configured after the installation is completed.
Printer Driver User Guide
Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-40)
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select
[Cancel].
• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).
2-34
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
2Display the screen.
3Select [Custom Install].
4Install the software.
1Select the device to be installed.
IMPORTANT
If Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct is enabled, be sure to specify the IP address for the port
name. Installation may fail if the host name is specified.
NOTE
• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the
machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and
that it is turned on and click (Reload).
• If the desired device does not appear, select [Add custom device] to directly select
the device.
1 Click [View License Agreement]
and read the License Agreement.
2 Click [Accept].
12
1
2
2-35
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
2Select the driver to be installed.
3Click [Utility] tab and select the utility to be installed.
4Click [Install].
2
3
1
23
1
2-36
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
5Finish the installation.
When "Your software is ready to use" appears, you can use the software. To print a test
page, click the "Print a test page" checkbox and select the machine.
Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.
If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.
This completes the printer driver installation procedure.
If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the following:
NOTE
To install Status Monitor on Windows versions preceding Windows 8, it is necessary to
install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 beforehand.
NOTE
When you have selected [Device settings] in Windows XP, the dialog box for device setting
will appear after [Finish] is clicked. Configure the settings for options installed on the
machine. Device settings can be configured after the installation is completed.
Printer Driver User Guide
Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-40)
2-37
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Uninstalling the Software
Perform the following procedure to delete the Software from your computer.
1Display the screen.
Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Uninstall Kyocera Product Library" in the search box.
Select [Uninstall Kyocera Product Library] in the search list.
2Uninstall the software.
Place a check in the check box of the software to be deleted.
3Finish uninstalling.
If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.
This completes the software uninstallation procedure.
NOTE
Uninstallation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [All Programs],
[Kyocera], and [Uninstall Kyocera Product Library] to display the Uninstall Wizard.
NOTE
The software can also be uninstalled using the Product Library.
In the Product Library screen, click [Uninstall], and follow the on-screen instructions to
uninstall the software.
2
1
2-38
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Installing Software in Mac Computer
The machine's printer functionality can be used by a Mac computer.
1Insert the DVD.
Double-click the [Kyocera] icon.
2Display the screen.
Double-click [Kyocera OS X x.x] depending on your Mac OS version.
3Install the Printer Driver.
Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software.
This completes the printer driver installation.
If a USB connection is used, the machine is automatically recognized and connected.
If an IP connection is used, the settings below are required.
NOTE
• Installation on Mac OS must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• When printing from a Macintosh computer, set the machine's emulation to [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)].
Printer (page 8-33)
• If connecting by Bonjour, enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings.
Bonjour (page 8-12)
• In the Authenticate screen, enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system.
• When printing via AirPrint, you do not have to install the software.
12
2-39
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
4Configure the printer.
1Open System Preferences and add the printer.
2
Select [
Default
] and click the item that appears in "Name" and then select the driver in
"Use".
3Select the options available for the machine.
4The selected machine is added.
NOTE
When using
an IP
connection,
click the IP icon for an IP connection and then enter the
host name or IP address.
The number entered in "Address" will automatically appear in
"Name". Change if needed.
12
1
2
4
3
1
2
2-40
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Setting TWAIN Driver
Register this machine to the TWAIN Driver. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1Display the screen.
1Click [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Select
[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list.
2Click [Add].
2Configure TWAIN Driver.
NOTE
In Windows 7, select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Kyocera] and then
[TWAIN Driver Setting]. TWAIN Driver screen appears.
1 Enter the machine name.
2 Select this machine from the list.
3 Enter the machine's IP address or host
name.
4 Set units of measurement.
5 When using SSL, select the checkbox
beside SSL.
6 Click [OK].
1 Enter the machine name.
2 Select this machine from the list.
3 Set units of measurement.
4 Set Compression Level.
5 Click [OK].
NOTE
When the machine's IP address or host name is unknown, contact Administrator.
3
2
1
5
4
6
(Network)
3
2
1
4
5
(USB)
2-41
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
3Finish registering.
NOTE
Click [Delete] to delete the added machine. Click [Edit] to change names.
2-42
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Setting WIA Driver
Register this machine to the WIA Driver. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1Display the screen.
1Click [Search] in charms, and enter "View scanners and cameras" in the search box.
Select [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras
screen appears.
2Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and click [Properties].
2Configure WIA Driver.
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and
File Search]. Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners
and Cameras screen appears.
1 Click the [Settings] tab.
2 Enter the machine IP addresses or host
name.
3 When using SSL, select the checkbox
beside SSL.
4 Set units of measurement.
5 Click [OK].
1 Click the [Settings] tab.
2 Set the Compression Level.
3 Set units of measurement.
4 Click [OK].
1
2
(Network) (USB)
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
3
4
2-43
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Checking the Counter
Checking the Counter
Check the number of sheets printed and scanned.
1Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Counter] > [OK] key
2Check the counter.
Select the item you want to check, and select the [OK] key.
2-44
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator
Additional Preparations for the Administrator
In addition to the information provided in this chapter, the administrator of this machine should check the following, and
configure the settings as needed.
Sending Documents to a PC
To Send to a Shared Folder (Send to Folder (SMB))
To send a document that has been loaded, you need to create a shared folder to receive the document on your computer.
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (page 3-10)
To E-mail Scanned Images (Send as E-mail)
You can send a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.
E-mail Settings (page 2-51)
Strengthening the Security
This machine is shipped with two default users registered one with Machine Administrator rights, and another with
Administrator rights.Logging in as this user will allow you to configure all settings; therefore, please change the login
user name and password.
In addition, this machine is equipped with user authentication function, which can be configured to limit the access to this
machine to only those who have a registered login name and password.
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) (page 9-1)
I want to... Function Reference page
Restrict the users of the machine. User Login page 9-2
Auto Panel Reset page 8-26
ID Card Settings*1
*1 The optional Card Authentication Kit is required.
page 9-19
Restrict the basic functions that can be used. Group Authorization Set. page 9-14
Prevent the data stored in the machine from
being leaked.
PDF Encryption Functions page 6-26
Protect the transmission from interception and
wiretapping.
IPP over SSL page 8-14
HTTPS page 8-14
LDAP Security Refer to the
Command Center
RX User Guide.
SMTP Security Refer to the
Command Center
RX User Guide.
POP3 Security Refer to the
Command Center
RX User Guide.
FTP Encrypted TX page 6-28
IPSec page 8-12
SNMPv3 page 8-12
2-45
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
Command Center RX
If the machine is connected to the network, you can configure various settings using Command Center RX.
This section explains how to access Command Center RX, and how to change security settings and the host name.
Command Center RX User Guide
Settings that the administrator and general users can configure in Command Center RX are as follows.
NOTE
To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, enter the User Name and Password and click [Login].
Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages, including Document Box,
Address Book, and Settings on the navigation menu. The factory default setting for the default user with administrator
privileges is shown below. (Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
Setting Description Administ-
rator
General
User
Device
Information
The machine's structure can be checked.
Job Status Displays all device information, including print and scan jobs, storing jobs,
scheduled jobs, and job log history.
Document Box*1
*1 The expansion memory or SD/SDHC memory card is required.
Configures settings related to the Job Box. -
Address Book Create, edit, or delete addresses and address groups. *2
*2 The logged in user may not be able to configure some settings, depending on the permissions of the user.
Device Settings Configure the advanced settings of the machine. -
Function Settings Configure the advanced function settings. -
Network Settings Configure the network advanced settings. -
Security Settings Configure the security advanced settings. -
Management
Settings
Configure the advanced management settings. -
NOTE
Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted.
FAX Operation Guide
2-46
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
Accessing Command Center RX
1Display the screen.
1Launch your Web browser.
2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report Print] >
[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Status Page] > [OK] key > [Yes]
Examples: https://192.168.48.21/ (for IP address)
https://MFP001 (if the host name is "MFP001")
The web page displays basic information about the machine and Command Center RX as well
as their current status.
2Configure the function.
Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen.
NOTE
If the screen "There is a problem with this website's security certificate." is displayed,
configure the certificate.
Command Center RX User Guide
You can also continue the operation without configuring the certificate.
NOTE
To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, enter the User Name and
Password and click [Login]. Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user
to access all pages, including Document Box, Address Book, and Settings on the navigation
menu. The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown
below. (Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
2-47
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
Changing Security Settings
1Display the screen.
1Launch your Web browser.
2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report Print] >
[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Status Page] > [OK] key > [Yes]
3Log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper
case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
4Click [Security Settings].
2-48
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
2Configure the Security Settings.
From the [Security Settings] menu, select the setting you want to configure.
NOTE
For details on settings related to certificates, refer to the following:
Command Center RX User Guide
2-49
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
Changing Device Information
1Display the screen.
1Launch your Web browser.
2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report Print] >
[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Status Page] > [OK] key > [Yes]
3Log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper
case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
4From the [Device Settings] menu, click [System].
3
1
2
2-50
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
2Specify the host name.
Enter the device information, and then click [Submit].
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
To restart the network, click [Reset] in the [Management Settings] menu, and then
click [Restart Network] in "Restart".
2-51
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
E-mail Settings
By configuring the SMTP settings, it is possible to send the images scanned by the machine as E-mail attachments and
to send E-mail notices when jobs have been completed.
To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.
In addition, configure the following.
•SMTP settings
Item: "SMTP Protocol" and "SMTP Server Name" in "SMTP"
• The sender address when the machine sends E-mails
Item: "Sender Address" in "E-mail Send Settings"
• The setting to limit the size of E-mails
Item: "E-mail Size Limit" in "E-mail Send Settings"
The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.
1Display the screen.
Display the SMTP Protocol screen.
1Launch your Web browser.
2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report Print] >
[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Status Page] > [OK] key > [Yes]
3Log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper
case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
2-52
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
4From the [Network Settings] menu, click [Protocol].
2Configure the settings.
Set "SMTP (E-mail TX)" to [On] in the "Send Protocols".
1
2
2-53
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
3Display the screen.
Display the E-mail Settings screen.
From the [Function Settings] menu, click [E-mail].
1
2
2-54
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
4Configure the settings.
Enter "SMTP" and "E-mail Send Settings" items.
5Click [Submit].
Setting Description
SMTP Set to send e-mail from the machine.
SMTP Protocol Displays the SMTP protocol settings. Check that "SMTP
Protocol" is set to [On]. If [Off] is set, click [Protocol] and set
the SMTP protocol to [On].
SMTP Server Name*1
*1 Be sure to enter the items.
Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.
SMTP Port Number Specify the port number to be used for SMTP. The default port
number is 25.
SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.
Authentication
Protocol
To use SMTP authentication, enter the user information for
authentication.
SMTP Security Set SMTP security.
Turn on "SMTP Security" in "SMTP (E-mail TX)" on the
[Protocol Settings] page.
Connection Test Tests to confirm that the E-mail function is operating under the
settings without sending a mail.
Domain Restriction To restrict the domains, click the [Domain List] and enter the
domain names of addresses to be allowed or rejected.
Restriction can also be specified by e-mail address.
POP3 POP3 Protocol You don't need to set the following items when you only
enable the function of sending e-mail from the machine. Set
the following items if you want to enable the function of
receiving e-mail on the machine.
Command Center RX User Guide
Check Interval
Run once now
Domain Restriction
POP3 User Settings
E-mail
Send
Settings
E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in
kilobytes. When E-mail size is greater than this value, an error
message appears and E-mail sending is cancelled. Use this
setting if you have set E-mail Size Limit for SMTP server. If
not, enter a value of 0 (zero) to enable E-mail sending
regardless of the size limit.
Sender Address*1 Specify the sender address for when the machine sends E-
mails, such as the machine administrator, so that a reply or
non-delivery report will go to a person rather than to the
machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for
SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender
address is 128 characters.
Signature Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will
appear at the end of the E-mail body. It is often used for
further identification of the machine. The maximum length of
the signature is 512 characters.
Function Defaults Change the function default settings in [Common/Job
Default Settings] page.
2-55
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
Registering Destinations
1Display the screen.
1Launch your Web browser.
2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report Print] >
[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Status Page] > [OK] key > [Yes]
3Log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper
case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
4From the [Address Book] menu, click [Machine Address Book].
5Click [Add].
2Populate the fields.
1Enter the destination information.
Enter the information for the destination you want to register. The fields to populate are the same as
when registering via operation panel.
2Click [Submit].
Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 3-20)
2
3
1
2-56
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
Transferring Data from Our Other Products
By using the machine's utility, you can smoothly migrate address books when the machine is to be replaced.
This section explains how to transfer data between our products.
Migrating the Address Book
The Address Book registered on the machine can be backed up or migrated using the KYOCERA Net Viewer on the
included DVD.
For details on operating the KYOCERA Net Viewer, refer to the following:
KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide
Backing Up Address Book Data to PC
1Launch the KYOCERA Net Viewer.
2Create a backup.
1Right-click on the model name from which you want to back up the Address Book, and
select [Advanced] - [Set multiple devices].
2Select [Custom Mode] and click [Next].
1
2
1
2
2-57
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
3Select destination device group and click [Next].
4Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].
5Select [Create from device] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on
target device], and then click [Next].
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
2-58
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
6Select the model you want to back up, and click [Next].
7Click on [Save to file].
8Specify the location to save the file, enter the file name, and then click [Save].
For "Save as type", make sure to select "XML File".
NOTE
If the "Admin Login" screen appears, enter the "Admin Login" and "Login Password", and
then click [OK]. The default settings are as follows (Upper case and lower case letters
are distinguished (case sensitive)).
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
1
2
2-59
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
9After saving the file, always click [Cancel] to close the screen.
Please note that selecting [Finish] will write the data to the machine's Address Book.
Writing Address Book Data to the Machine
1Launch the KYOCERA Net Viewer.
2Load the Address Book data.
1Right-click on the model name to which you want to transfer the Address Book, and select
[Advanced] - [Set multiple devices].
2Select [Custom Mode] and click [Next].
1
2
1
2
2-60
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
3Select destination device group and click [Next].
4Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].
5Select [Create from file] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on target
device], and then click [Next].
Selecting the [Overwrite settings on target device] checkbox will overwrite the machine's
Address Book from entry No.1.
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
2-61
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
6Click [Browse] and select the backup Address Book file, and then click [Next].
7Click [Finish].
The write process of the Address Book data starts.
8Once the write process is complete, click [Close].
1
2
3-1
3
Preparation before Use
This chapter explains the following operations.
Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Precaution for Loading Paper .................................................................................................................. 3-2
Selecting the Paper Feeder Units ............................................................................................................ 3-3
Loading in the Cassette 1 ........................................................................................................................ 3-4
Loading in the Cassette 2 ........................................................................................................................ 3-7
Precautions for Outputting Paper ....................................................................................................................... 3-9
Paper Stopper .......................................................................................................................................... 3-9
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC ................................................................... 3-10
Making a note of the computer name and full computer name .............................................................. 3-10
Making a note of the user name and domain name ............................................................................... 3-11
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ............................................................... 3-12
Configuring Windows Firewall ............................................................................................................... 3-15
Registering Destinations in the Address Book ................................................................................................. 3-20
Adding a Destination (Address Book) .................................................................................................... 3-20
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) ................................................................... 3-27
3-2
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Loading Paper
Precaution for Loading Paper
When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps.
Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface.
In addition, note the following points.
• If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Paper that is curled or folded
may cause a jam.
• Avoid exposing opened paper to high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems.
Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multipurpose tray or cassettes back in the
paper storage bag.
• If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by
removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
IMPORTANT
If you copy onto used paper (paper already used for printing), do not use paper that is
stapled or clipped together. This may damage the machine or cause poor image
quality.
NOTE
If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like
logo or company name, refer to the following:
Paper (page 11-13)
3-3
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Selecting the Paper Feeder Units
Select the paper feeder units according to the size and type of paper.
No. Name Paper Size Paper Type Capacity Page
1Cassette 1
A4, B5, A5-R, A5, A6, B6, Legal,
Oficio II, Letter, Executive,
Statement-R, Folio, 16K,
216mm×340mm, B5(ISO), Custom
Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled,
Rough, Letterhead, Color,
Prepunched, Thick, High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8
250 sheets
(80 g/m2)
page 3-4
2Cassette 2 page 3-7
NOTE
• The number of sheets that can be held varies depending on your environment and paper type.
• You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such paper may cause paper
jams or other faults.)
• For higher quality color printing, use special color paper.
1
2
3-4
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Loading in the Cassette 1
1Pull the Cassette 1 completely out of the machine.
2Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required.
When using Folio, Oficio II or Legal
NOTE
In some regions the cassette comes with a cover. If the cassette has a cover, open the
cover to adjust the guide.
3-5
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
3
Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left
and right sides of the Cassette 1.
4
Load paper.
NOTE
If the cassette has a cover, close the cover.
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the
multipurpose tray.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled
or folded may cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration
above).
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide,
the paper may skew or become jammed.
3-6
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
5Gently push the Cassette 1 back in.
6Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >
[Orig./Paper Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Cassette 1 Set.] > [OK] key
7Configure the function.
Select the paper size and paper type.
NOTE
When Folio, Oficio II, or Legal is used, the cassette will extend out from the machine.
Cassette 1 (2) Set. (page 8-21)
3-7
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Loading in the Cassette 2
1Pull the Cassette 2 completely out of the machine.
2Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required.
3
Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left
and right sides of the Cassette 2.
3-8
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
4
Load paper.
5Gently push the Cassette 2 back in.
6Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >
[Orig./Paper Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Cassette 2 Set.] > [OK] key
7Configure the function.
Select the paper size and paper type.
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the
multipurpose tray.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled
or folded may cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration
above).
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide,
the paper may skew or become jammed.
Cassette 1 (2) Set. (page 8-21)
3-9
Preparation before Use > Precautions for Outputting Paper
Precautions for Outputting Paper
Paper Stopper
When using paper B5/Letter or larger, open the paper stopper shown in the figure.
3-10
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
Preparation for Sending a Document to a
Shared Folder in a PC
Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your
computer. Screens of Windows 8.1 are used in the following explanation. The details of the screens will vary in other
versions of Windows.
Making a note of the computer name and full
computer name
Check the name of the computer name and full computer name.
1Display the screen.
In Windows 8.1, right-click [PC] in the Start screen and select [Properties]. Or, right-click the
Window icon and select [System].
In Windows 8, select the desktop in the Start screen, right-click [Computer] from [Libraries],
and then select [Properties].
2Check the computer name.
Check the computer name and full computer name.
Screen example:
Computer name: PC001
Full computer name: PC001.abcdnet.com
Windows XP:
If the full computer name does not have a dot (.), the full computer name and the computer
name are the same.
If the full computer name has a dot (.), the text string in front of the dot (.) in the full computer
name is the computer name.
Example: PC001.abcdnet.com
PC001 is the computer name
PC001.abcdnet.com is the full computer name
After checking the computer name, click the [Close] button to close the
"System Properties" screen.
In Windows XP, after checking the computer name, click the [Cancel] button to close the
"System Properties" screen.
NOTE
Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
NOTE
In Windows XP, right-click [My Computer] and select [Properties]. The [System
Properties] dialog box appears. Click the [Computer Name] tab in the window that
appears.
In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Computer] and then [System
Properties].
In Windows 10, right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [System].
3-11
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
Making a note of the user name and domain name
Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows.
1Display the screen.
Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Command Prompt" in the search box. Select [Command
Prompt] in the search list.
In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [All Programs] (or [Programs]),
[Accessories] and then [Command Prompt].
In Windows 10, right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [Command Prompt].
The Command Prompt window appears.
2Check the domain name and user name.
At the Command Prompt, enter "net config workstation" and then press [Enter].
Check the user name and domain name.
Screen example:
User Name: james.smith
Domain Name: ABCDNET
3-12
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared
Folder
Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer.
1Create a folder.
Create a folder on your computer.
For example, create a folder with the name "scannerdata" on the desktop.
NOTE
If there is a workgroup in System Properties, configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or group.
1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], [Appearance and
Personalization], and then [Folder Options].
In Windows XP, click [My Computer] and select [Folder Options] in [Tools].
In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [Appearance
and Personalization], and then [Folder Options].
In Windows 10, open up a window in File Explorer and select [View], [Options], and then
[Folder Options].
2
Remove the checkmark from [Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended)] in "Advanced
settings".
In Windows XP, click the [View] tab and remove the checkmark from
[Use Simple File Sharing (Recommended)] in "Advanced settings".
1
2
3
Make sure that the [View] tab is selected.
3-13
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
2Configure permission settings.
1Right-click the "scannerdata" folder, select [Property], and click [Sharing] and
[Advanced Sharing].
In Windows XP, right-click the "scannerdata" folder and select [Sharing and Security] (or
[Sharing]).
2Select the [Share this folder] checkbox and click the [Permissions] button.
In Windows XP, select [Share this folder] and click the [Permissions] button.
3Make a note of the [Share name].
4Click the [Add] button.
1
2
1
2
3-14
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
5Specify the location.
5Set the access permission for the user selected.
In Windows XP, go to step 7.
6Click the [OK] button in the "Advanced Sharing" screen to close the screen.
1 If the computer name that you made a note of on page is the same as the domain
name:
If the computer name is not shown in "From this location", click the [Locations] button,
select the computer name, and click the [OK] button.
Example: PC001
If the computer name that you made a note of on page is not the same as the domain
name:
If the text after the first dot (.) in the full computer name that you made a note of does
not appear in "From this location", click the [Locations] button, select the text after the
dot (.), and click the [OK] button.
Example: abcdnet.com
Making a note of the user name and domain name (page 3-11)
2 Enter the user name that you made a note of on page in the text box, and click the [OK]
button.
Also the user name can be made by clicking the [Advanced] button and selecting a
user.
NOTE
"Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. To strengthen
security, it is recommended that you select "Everyone" and remove the "Read" [Allow]
checkmark.
2
1
1
2
3
1 Select the user you entered.
2 Select the [Allow] checkbox of the
"Change" and "Read" permissions
3 Press [OK].
3-15
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
7Check the details set in the [Security] tab.
In Windows XP, make sure that checkmarks appear on [Allow] checkbox for the "Modify"
and "Read & execute" permissions, and click the [OK] button.
Configuring Windows Firewall
Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission.
1Check file and printer sharing.
1In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], [System and Security], and then
[Windows Firewall].
NOTE
Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
NOTE
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.
1 Select the [Security] tab.
2 Select the user you entered.
If the user does not appear on "Group or
user names", click [Edit] button to add user
in a similar way of "configuration of
permission settings".
3 Make sure that checkmarks appear on
[Allow] checkbox for the "Modify" and
"Read & execute" permissions.
4 Click the [Close] button.
2
3
4
1
3-16
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
2Select the [File and Printer Sharing] checkbox.
2Add a port.
1In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], [System and Security], and
[Check firewall status].
2Select [Advanced settings].
3Select [Inbound Rules].
1
2
3
3-17
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
4Select [New Rules].
5Select [Port].
6Select [TCP] as the port to apply the rule to. Then select [Specific local ports] and enter
"445" then click [Next].
1
2
2
1
3
3-18
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
7Select [Allow the connection] and click the [Next] button.
8Make sure all checkboxes are selected and click the [Next] button.
9Enter "Scan to SMB" in "Name" and click [Finish].
1
2
1
2
1
2
3-19
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
In Windows 7
1From [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [System and Security], and
[Allow a program through Windows Firewall].
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.
2Configure the settings.
In Windows XP or Windows Vista
1In Windows XP, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], and then
[Windows Firewall].
In Windows Vista, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [Security],
and then [Turn Windows Firewall on or off].
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.
2Click the [Exceptions] tab and then the [Add port...] button.
3Specify Add a Port settings.
Enter any name in "Name" (example: Scan to SMB). This will be the name of the new port.
Enter "445" in "Port Number". Select [TCP] for "Protocol".
4Click [OK] button.
In Windows 10
1Right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [Control Panel], [System and
Security], and then [Allow an app through Windows Firewall].
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.
2Configure the settings.
Configuring Windows Firewall (page 3-15)
Configuring Windows Firewall (page 3-15)
3-20
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Save frequently used destinations to the Address Book or One Touch Keys. The saved destinations can be changed.
The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission.
Adding a Destination (Address Book)
Add a new destination to the Address Book. There are two registering methods, contacts and groups. When adding a
group, enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book.
Registering a contact address
A maximum of 100 contact addresses can be registered. Each address can include the information such as destination
name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, computer folder path, and FAX No.
1Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Address Book] > [OK] key > [Menu] > [▲] [] key > [Add Address] > [OK] key >
[▲][]key > [Contact] > [OK] key
2Add the name.
1[◄] [►] key > [Contact Name] > [Edit]
2Enter the destination name displayed on the Address Book and select the [OK] key.
3Add the address.
E-mail Address
1[◄] [►] key > [E-mailAddress] > [Edit]
2Enter the E-mail address > [OK] key
NOTE
Registering and editing of the Address Book can also be done in Command Center RX.
Registering Destinations (page 2-55)
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with
administrator privileges.
NOTE
Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
Character Entry Method (page 11-8)
NOTE
Up to 128 characters can be entered.
Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
Character Entry Method (page 11-8)
3-21
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
The Folder (SMB) Address
1[◄] [►] key > [Folder (SMB)] > [Edit]
2Enter the information for "Host Name (SMB)", "Path", "Login User Name" and "Login
Password" > [OK] key
The table below explains the items to be entered.
3The connection confirmation screen appears. Select [Yes] to check the connection and
[No] to not check it.
"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If "Cannot
connect." appears, review the entry.
NOTE
For the computer name, share name, domain name, and user name, enter the
information that you noted when you created the shared folder. For details on creating
shared folders, refer to the following:
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (page 3-10)
Item Description Max. No. of
Characters
Host Name (SMB)*1
*1 To specify a port number different from the default (445), enter using the format
"Host name: port number" (Example: SMBhostname:140).
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(Example: [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)
Computer name Up to
64 characters
Path Share name
For example:
scannerdata
If saving in a folder in the shared folder:
share name\folder name in shared folder
Up to
128 characters
Login User Name If the computer name and domain name are the same:
User Name
For example: james.smith
If the computer name and domain name are different:
Domain name\User name
For example: abcdnet\james.smith
Up to
64 characters
Login Password Windows logon password
(Case sensitive.)
Up to
64 characters
NOTE
Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
Character Entry Method (page 11-8)
3-22
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
The Folder (FTP) Address
1[◄] [►] key > [Folder (FTP)] > [Edit]
2Enter the information for "Host Name (FTP)", "Path", "Login User Name" and "Login
Password" > [OK] key
The table below explains the items to be entered.
3The connection confirmation screen appears. Select [Yes] to check the connection and
[No] to not check it.
If [SSL] is enabled in [Secure Settings], "Connect with encrypt communication?" will appear after
you select [Yes]. If [Yes] is selected, the FTP encrypted communication connection will be confirmed.
If [No] is selected, you will return to the regular connection confirmation screen.
"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If "Cannot
connect." appears, review the entry.
4Specify the address number.
1[◄] [►] key > [Address Number] > [Edit]
2Enter an address number.
3Select the [OK] key.
Item Descriptions Max. No. of
Characters
Host Name (FTP)*1
*1 If you specify a port number other than the default (21), use the "Host name: port number" (Example:
FTPhostname:140).
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(Example: [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)
Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to
64 characters
Path*2
*2 When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is combined by the
slash "/" not using the back-slash.
Path for the file to be stored
For example: User\ScanData
If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory.
Up to
128 characters
Login User Name FTP server login user name Up to
64 characters
Login Password FTP server login password Up to
64 characters
NOTE
Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
Character Entry Method (page 11-8)
NOTE
You can set any value between 1 and 120.
Use the numeric keys or select the [▲] or [▼] key to enter a number.
Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number.
If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when
you select the [OK] key and the number cannot be registered.
3-23
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
5Check if the destination entry is correct and select the [OK]
key.
The destination is added to the Address Book.
Registering a Group
Compile two or more contacts into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When adding a
group, a maximum of 20 groups can be added in the Address Book.
1Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Address Book] > [OK] key > [Menu] > [▲] [] key > [Add Address] > [OK] key >
[▲][]key > [Group] > [OK] key
2Add the name.
1[◄] [►] key > [Group Name] > [Edit]
2Enter the group name displayed on the Address Book and select the [OK] key.
3 Select the members (destinations).
1
[◄] [►] key > [
Group Member
] > [
Edit
] > [
Menu
] > [▲] [
] key > [
Add Member
] > [
OK
] key
2Select the member you want to add, and select the [OK] key.
3Select the destination to be registered in the group from the destinations registered in the
contact addresses and select the [OK] key.
The selected member is added to group member.
Members can be added by repeating steps 3-1 to 3-3.
4Select the [Back] key.
NOTE
To add a group, you need individually added destinations. Register one or more individual destinations as needed
before proceeding. Up to 100 individually registered destinations and a combined total of up to 5 SMB and FTP
destination folders can be registered in a single group.
NOTE
Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
Character Entry Method (page 11-8)
NOTE
Select [Menu] and select [Search(Name)] to search using a name.
3-24
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
4Specify the address number.
1[◄] [►] key > [Address Number] > [Edit]
2Enter an address number.
3Select the [OK] key.
5Select the [OK] key.
The group is added to the Address Book.
NOTE
• You can set any value between 1 and 120.
• Use the numeric keys or select the [▲] or [▼] key to enter a number.
• Address Number is an ID for a destination. A free number can be selected.
• If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears
when you select the [OK] key and the number cannot be registered.
3-25
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Editing Address Book Entries
Edit the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.
1Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Address Book] > [OK] key
2Edit the destination.
Editing a Contact
1Select the destination (contacts) to edit, and select the [OK] key.
2Change "Contact Name", destination type and address, and "Address Number".
3After you have completed the changes, [OK] key > [Yes]
Register the changed destination.
Editing a Group
1Select the group to edit, and select the [OK] key.
2Change "Group Name" and "Address Number".
3[◄] [►] key > [Group Member] > [Edit]
4To delete the destination from the group, select the destination > [Menu] > [▲] [] key >
[Delete] > [OK] key
To add the destination, select [Add Member].
5Select [Yes].
6After you have completed the changes, [OK] key > [Yes]
Register the changed group.
NOTE
Select [Menu] and select [Search(Name)] to search using a name.
Registering a contact address (page 3-20)
Registering a Group (page 3-23)
NOTE
Select the destination and select the [OK] key to show the detailed information of the
destination.
Registering a Group (page 3-23)
3-26
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Deleting Address Book Entries
Delete the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.
1Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Address Book]
2Delete the destination.
Select the destination (contacts) or group to delete, [Menu] > [▲] [▼] key > [Delete] >
[OK]key > [Yes]
3-27
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch
Key)
Assign a new destination (contact or group) to an one touch key. A maximum of 22 destinations can be registered.
1Select the One Touch Key to be registered.
1In the Send or FAX screen, press the One Touch Key that you want to register and hold it
(2 seconds or more).
2[▲] [] key > key number > [OK] key
Select a One Touch Key number with no registered destination.
2Select the destinations.
Select the destination to be registered to the One touch key from the destinations registered in
the addresses and select the [OK] key.
The destination will be added to the One Touch Key.
NOTE
• Numbers 1 to 11 are the One Touch Key numbers while the [Shift Lock] indicator is switched off. Numbers 12 to 22
are the One Touch Key numbers while the [Shift Lock] indicator is switched on by selecting the [Shift Lock] key.
• Refer to the following for use of One Touch Key.
Checking and Editing Destinations (page 5-31)
• You can add One Touch keys and change their settings on Command Center RX.
Registering Destinations (page 2-55)
NOTE
Select [Menu] and select [Search(Name)] to search using a name.
3-28
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Editing One Touch Key
1Select the One Touch Key to edit.
1Press the One Touch Key to edit and hold it (2 seconds or more).
2[▲] [] key > key number > [OK] key
When an unregistered One Touch Key number is selected, the Address Book appears. The One
Touch Key can be registered by selecting the destination from the Address Book.
2Edit the destination.
1[▲] [] key > [Edit] > [OK] key
2Select the new destination, and select the [OK] key > [Yes]
Register the changed destination.
Deleting One Touch Key
1Select the One Touch Key to delete.
1Press the One Touch Key to delete and hold it (2 seconds or more).
2[▲] [] key > key number > [OK] key
When an unregistered One Touch Key number is selected, the Address Book appears. The One
Touch Key can be registered by selecting the destination from the Address Book.
2Delete the destination.
[▲] [] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]
Deletion of the data registered in the One Touch Key.
NOTE
Select [Detail] and select the [OK] key to show the detailed information of the
destination.
4-1
4 Printing from PC
This chapter explains the following topics:
Printer Driver Properties Screen ........................................................................................................................ 4-2
Displaying the Printer Driver Help ............................................................................................................ 4-3
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 8.1) ................................................................... 4-3
Printing from PC ................................................................................................................................................. 4-4
Printing on Standard Sized Paper ............................................................................................................ 4-4
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper .................................................................................................... 4-6
Canceling Printing from a Computer ........................................................................................................ 4-8
Printing from the Handheld Device .................................................................................................................... 4-9
Printing by AirPrint ................................................................................................................................... 4-9
Printing by Google Cloud Print ................................................................................................................ 4-9
Printing by Mopria .................................................................................................................................... 4-9
Printing with Wi-Fi Direct ......................................................................................................................... 4-9
Printing Data Saved in the Printer .................................................................................................................... 4-10
Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job .............................................................. 4-10
Printing Documents from Private Print Box ............................................................................................. 4-11
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box ......................................................................... 4-11
Printing Document from Stored Job Box ................................................................................................ 4-12
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box .......................................................................... 4-13
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box .............................................................................................. 4-14
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box ......................................................................... 4-14
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box ......................................................................................... 4-15
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box ................................................................... 4-16
Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor) ................................................................................................. 4-17
Accessing the Status Monitor ................................................................................................................ 4-17
Exiting the Status Monitor ...................................................................................................................... 4-17
Quick View State .................................................................................................................................... 4-17
Printing Progress Tab ............................................................................................................................ 4-18
Paper Tray Status Tab ........................................................................................................................... 4-18
Toner Status Tab .................................................................................................................................... 4-18
Alert Tab ................................................................................................................................................. 4-19
Status Monitor Context Menu ................................................................................................................ 4-19
Status Monitor Notification Settings ....................................................................................................... 4-20
4-2
Printing from PC > Printer Driver Properties Screen
Printer Driver Properties Screen
The printer driver properties screen allows you to configure a variety of print-related settings.
Printer Driver User Guide
No. Description
1 [Quick Print] tab
Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions. Each time you click an icon, it
changes to an image resembling the print results and applies the settings.
[Basic] tab
This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used. You can use it to configure the paper size and duplex
printing.
[Layout] tab
This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts, including booklet printing, combine mode,
poster printing, and scaling.
[Imaging] tab
This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality of the print results.
[Publishing] tab
This tab lets you create covers and inserts for print jobs and put inserts between sheets of OHP film.
[Job] tab
This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine. Regularly used
documents and other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later. Since saved documents can
be printed directly from the machine, this function is also convenient when you wish to print a document that
you don't want others to see.
[Advanced] tab
This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data.
2 [Profiles]
Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile. Saved profiles can be recalled at any time, so it's a
convenient practice to save frequently used settings.
3[Reset]
Click to revert settings to their initial values.
1
2
3
4-3
Printing from PC > Printer Driver Properties Screen
Displaying the Printer Driver Help
The printer driver includes Help. To learn about print settings, open the printer driver print settings screen and display
Help as explained below.
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings
(Windows 8.1)
The default printer driver settings can be changed. By selecting frequently used settings, you can omit steps when
printing. For the settings, refer to the following:
Printer Driver User Guide
1In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], and
then [Devices and Printers].
2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the
[Printer properties] menu of the printer driver.
3Click the [Basic] button on the [General] tab.
4Select the default settings and click the [OK] button.
NOTE
You can also display the printer driver help when you click the desired item and press the [F1] key on your keyboard.
1
2
1 Click the [?] button in the upper right corner of the
screen.
2 Click the item you want to know about.
4-4
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
Printing from PC
This section provides the printing method using the KX DRIVER.
Printing on Standard Sized Paper
If you loaded a paper size that is included in the print sizes of the machine, select the paper size in the [Basic] tab of the
print settings screen of the printer driver.
1Display the screen.
Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.
2Configure the settings.
1Select the machine from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.
NOTE
• To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied DVD
(Product Library).
• In some environments, the current settings are displayed at the bottom of the printer driver.
• When printing the cardstock or envelopes, load the cardstock or envelopes in the multipurpose tray before
performing the following procedure.
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 5-5)
NOTE
Specify the paper size and media type to print from the operation panel.
Orig./Paper Set. (page 8-20)
12
4-5
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
2Select the [Basic] tab.
3Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size to use for printing.
To load the paper of size that is not included in print sizes of the machine such as cardstock or
envelopes, the paper size needs to be registered.
To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu and select
the media type.
4Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.
3Start printing.
Click the [OK] button.
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper (page 4-6)
4-6
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper
If you loaded a paper size that is not included in the print sizes of the machine, register the paper size in the [Basic] tab
of the print settings screen of the printer driver.
The registered size can be selected from the "Print size" menu.
1Display the print settings screen.
1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices
and Printers].
2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of
the printer driver.
3Click the [Basic] button on the [General] tab.
2Register the paper size.
1Click the [Basic] tab.
2Click the [Page Size...] button.
3Click the [New] button.
4Enter the paper size.
5Enter the name of the paper.
NOTE
To execute printing at the machine, set the paper size and type in the following:
Orig./Paper Set. (page 8-20)
NOTE
In Windows 8, click [
Start
] button on the Windows, and then click [
Devices and Printers
].
1
2
5
3
4
6
7
4-7
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
6Click the [Save] button.
7Click the [OK] button.
8Click the [OK] button.
3Display the screen.
Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.
4Select the paper size and type of non-standard size paper.
1Select the machine from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.
2Select the [Basic] tab.
8
12
4-8
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
3Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size registered in step 2.
To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu and select
the media type.
4Select the paper source in the "Source" menu.
5Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.
5Start printing.
Click the [OK] button.
Canceling Printing from a Computer
To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before the printer begins printing, do the following:
1Double-click the printer icon ( ) displayed on the taskbar at
the bottom right of the Windows desktop to display a dialog
box for the printer.
2Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing and select
[Cancel] from the "Document" menu.
NOTE
If you loaded a postcard or envelope, select [Cardstock] or [Envelope] in the "Media
type" menu.
NOTE
When canceling printing from this machine, refer to the following:
Canceling Jobs (page 5-13)
4-9
Printing from PC > Printing from the Handheld Device
Printing from the Handheld Device
This machine supports the AirPrint, Google Cloud Print, Mopria and Wi-Fi Direct.
According to the supported OS and application, you can print the job from any handheld device or computer without
installing a printer driver.
Printing by AirPrint
AirPrint is a printing function that is included standard in iOS 4.2 and later products, and Mac OS X 10.7 and later
products.
To use the AirPrint, make sure that the AirPrint setting is enabled in the Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide
Printing by Google Cloud Print
Google Cloud Print is a printing service provided by Google. This service enables a user with a Google account to print
from a machine connected to the Internet.
The machine can be configured in the Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide
Printing by Mopria
Mopria is a standard on printing function included in Android 4.4 or later products. Mopria Print Service needs to be
installed and enabled in advance.
For details on how to use, refer to a Web site of Mopria Alliance.
Printing with Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct is a wireless LAN standard that Wi-Fi Alliance has been established. This is one of the functions of the
wireless LAN, without a wireless LAN access point or wireless LAN router, between devices can communicate directly
on a peer to peer basis.
The printing procedure by the Wi-Fi Direct is the same as that from the normal handheld devices.
When you use a printer name or Bonjour name on the port settings of the printer property, you can print the job by
specifying the name at Wi-Fi Direct connection.
When you use an IP address for the port, specify the IP address of this machine.
NOTE
A Google account is necessary to use Google Cloud Print. Obtain a Google account if you do not have one.
It is also necessary to register the machine with the Google Cloud Print service in advance. The machine can be
registered from a PC connected to the same network.
4-10
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Data Saved in the Printer
You can save the print job into the Job Box of this device and print it as necessary. To use the Stored Job Box and the
Quick Copy Box, an SD/SDHC memory card must be installed in the device. To use the Private Print Box and the Proof
and Hold Box, an expansion memory or SD/SDHC memory card must be installed in the device.
If you configure settings in the [Job] tab of the printer driver and then print, the print job will be saved in the Job Box
(memory) and printing can be executed at the machine.
Follow the work flow below when using Job Box.
Specifying the Job Box from a computer and sending the print job. (page 4-10)
Using the operation panel to specify a file within a Box and printing it.
You can print the documents from the following boxes.
Printing Documents from Private Print Box (page 4-11)
Printing Document from Stored Job Box (page 4-12)
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box (page 4-14)
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box (page 4-15)
Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing
the Job
1Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.
The Print dialog box displays.
2Select the machine from the "Name" menu.
3Click the [Properties] button.
The Properties dialog box displays.
4Click the [Job] tab and select the [Job storage (e-MPS)] check
box to set the function.
IMPORTANT
Unencrypted data is saved on the SD/SDHC memory card.
Exercise caution when saving sensitive documents.
NOTE
• To use expansion memory, [RAM Disk Mode] must be [On].
RAM Disk Mode (page 8-30)
• If you are using an SD/SDHC memory card to use a job box, set [RAM Disk Mode] to [Off].
NOTE
For information on how to use the printer driver software, refer to the following:
Printer Driver User Guide
4-11
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Documents from Private Print Box
In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not to be printed until you operate the machine. When sending the job
from the application software, specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver. The job is released for printing by
entering the access code on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of the print job. The data will be deleted upon
completion of the print job or after the power switch is turned off.
1Display the screen.
1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Private/Stored] > [OK] key
2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.
2Print the document.
1Select the document to print, and [Select] > [OK] key.
The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.
Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.
2[▲] [] key > [Print] > [OK] key
3Enter the access code.
4Specify the number of copies to print as desired, and the [OK] key > [Yes].
Printing starts.
Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is automatically deleted.
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print
Box
1Display the screen.
1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Private/Stored] > [OK] key
2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.
NOTE
Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.
• [Select All]: Select all files.
• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.
• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.
4-12
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
2Delete the document.
1Select the document to delete, and [Select] > [OK] key.
The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.
Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.
2[▲] [] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > Enter the access code > [OK] key > [Yes]
The document is deleted.
Printing Document from Stored Job Box
In Stored Job, the print data sent from the application is saved to the machine. You can set up an access code as
necessary. If you set up an access code, enter the access code when printing. Print data will be stored in the Stored Job
Box after printing. This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly.
1Display the screen.
1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >
[Private/Stored] > [OK] key
2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.
2Print the document.
1Select the document to print, and [Select] > [OK] key.
The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.
Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.
2[▲] [] key > [Print] > [OK] key
3Specify the number of copies to print as desired, and the [OK] key > [Yes].
Printing starts.
NOTE
Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.
• [Select All]: Select all files.
• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.
• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.
NOTE
Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.
• [Select All]: Select all files.
• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.
• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.
NOTE
If the document is protected by an access code, the password entry screen will be
displayed. Enter the password using the numeric keys.
4-13
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box
1Display the screen.
1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Private/Stored] > [OK] key
2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.
2Print and delete the document.
1Select the document to delete, and [Select] > [OK] key.
The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.
Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.
2[▲] [▼] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]
The document is deleted.
NOTE
Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.
• [Select All]: Select all files.
• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.
• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.
NOTE
If the document is protected by an access code, the password entry screen will be
displayed. Enter the password using the numeric keys.
4-14
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box
Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed. Activating Quick Copy and printing a
document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the Quick Copy Job Box. When additional copies
are required, you can reprint the required number of copies from the operation panel. By default, up to 32 documents
can be stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.
1Display the screen.
1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Quick/Proof] > [OK] key
2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.
2Print the document.
1Select the document to print, and [Select] > [OK] key.
The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.
Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.
2[▲] [] key > [Print] > [OK] key
3Specify the number of copies to print as desired, and the [OK] key > [Yes].
Printing starts.
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box
1Display the screen.
1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Quick/Proof] > [OK] key
2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.
NOTE
• When the number of jobs reaches the limit, the oldest job will be overwritten by the new one.
• To maintain free space on the box, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.
Quick Copy Jobs (page 8-36)
NOTE
Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.
• [Select All]: Select all files.
• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.
• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.
4-15
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
2Delete the document.
1Select the document to delete, and [Select] > [OK] key.
The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.
Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.
2[▲] [] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]
The document is deleted.
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box
The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the remaining
copies. Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while
maintaining the document data in the Job Box. To continue to print the remaining copies, use the operation panel. You
can change the number of copies to print.
1Display the screen.
1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Quick/Proof] > [OK] key
2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.
2Print the document.
1Select the document to print, and [Select] > [OK] key.
The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.
Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.
2[▲] [] key > [Print] > [OK] key
3Specify the number of copies to print as desired, and the [OK] key > [Yes].
Printing starts.
NOTE
Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.
• [Select All]: Select all files.
• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.
• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.
NOTE
Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.
•[Select All]: Select all files.
•[Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.
•[Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.
4-16
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold
Box
1Display the screen.
1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >
[Quick/Proof] > [OK] key
2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.
2Delete the document.
1Select the document to delete, and [Select] > [OK] key.
The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.
Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.
2[▲] [] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]
The document is deleted.
NOTE
Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.
•[Select All]: Select all files.
•[Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.
•[Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.
4-17
Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Monitoring the Printer Status (Status
Monitor)
The Status Monitor monitors the machine status and provides an ongoing reporting function.
Accessing the Status Monitor
The Status Monitor also starts up when printing is started.
Exiting the Status Monitor
Use either of the methods listed below to exit the Status Monitor.
• Exit manually:
Click the settings icon and select Exit in the menu to exit the Status Monitor.
• Exit automatically:
The Status Monitor automatically shuts down after 7 minutes if it is not being used.
Quick View State
The status of the machine is displayed using icons. Detailed information is displayed when the Expand button is clicked.
Detailed information is displayed by clicking on each icon tab.
NOTE
When you activate Status Monitor, check the status below.
• KX DRIVER is installed.
•Either [Enhanced WSD] or [EnhancedWSD(SSL)] is enabled.
Network Setting (page 8-7)
1 Printing Progress Tab
2 Paper Tray Status Tab
3 Toner Status Tab
4Alert Tab
5 Expand button
6 Settings icon
12 3 45 6
4-18
Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Printing Progress Tab
The status of the print jobs is displayed.
Select a job on the job list and it can be canceled using the menu displayed with a right-click.
Paper Tray Status Tab
Information is displayed about the paper in the printer and about the amount of paper remaining.
Toner Status Tab
The amount of toner remaining is displayed.
1Status icon
2 Job list
1
2
4-19
Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Alert Tab
If an error occurs, a notice is displayed using a 3D image and a message.
Status Monitor Context Menu
The following menu is displayed when the settings icon is clicked.
• Command Center RX
If the printer is connected to a TCP/IP network and has its own IP address, use a web browser to access the
Command Center RX to modify or confirm the network settings.This menu is not displayed when using USB
connection.
Command Center RX User Guide
• Notification…
This sets the display of the Status Monitor.
Status Monitor Notification Settings (page 4-20)
• www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com
Open our website.
•Exit
Exits the Status Monitor.
4-20
Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Status Monitor Notification Settings
Click the setting icon to display valid events in the status monitor notification screen.
Select whether notification is performed when an error in the event list occurs.
1Select Enable event notification.
If this setting is set to Off, then the Status Monitor will not start up even when printing is
executed.
2Select an event to use with the text to speech function in
Available events.
3Click Sound file / Text to Speech column.
Click the browse (...) button to notify the event by sound file.
When customizing the message texts to read on the screen aloud, enter the texts in the text
box.
NOTE
The available file format is WAV.
5-1
5
Operation on the Machine
This chapter explains the following topics:
Loading Originals .......................................... 5-2
Placing Originals on the Platen ........... 5-2
Loading Originals in the Document
Processor ............................................ 5-3
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray ....... 5-5
Program ........................................................ 5-8
Registering Programs ......................... 5-8
Recalling Program .............................. 5-9
Overwriting Program ......................... 5-10
Deleting Program .............................. 5-10
Select Key Settings ...................................... 5-11
Copying ....................................................... 5-12
Basic Operation ................................ 5-12
Canceling Jobs ................................. 5-13
Frequently-Used Sending Method .............. 5-14
Sending Document via E-mail ..................... 5-15
Configuring Settings before Sending .... 5-15
Sending Scanned Document via
E-mail ................................................ 5-15
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder
on a Computer (Scan to PC) ....................... 5-16
Configuring Settings before Sending .... 5-16
Sending Document to Desired Shared
Folder on a Computer ....................... 5-16
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server
(Scan to FTP) .............................................. 5-18
Configuring Settings before Sending .... 5-18
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP
Server ............................................... 5-18
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA ................... 5-20
Configuring Settings before Sending .... 5-20
Scanning Document Using
Application ........................................ 5-20
Useful Sending Method ............................... 5-21
WSD Scan .................................................. 5-22
Installing Driver Software .................. 5-22
WSD scan ......................................... 5-23
Sending to Different Types of Destinations
(Multi Sending) ............................................ 5-25
Send to Me (E-mail) .................................... 5-26
Sending a document to the mail address
of the logged in user ......................... 5-26
Canceling Sending Jobs ............................. 5-27
Handling Destination ................................... 5-28
Specifying Destination ...................... 5-28
Choosing from the Address Book ..... 5-28
Choosing from the External
Address Book ................................... 5-29
Choosing from the One Touch Key ... 5-30
Checking and Editing Destinations ... 5-31
Confirmation Screen of Destinations .... 5-32
Recall ................................................ 5-32
How to use the FAX Function ..................... 5-33
Using Document Boxes .............................. 5-34
What is Job Box? .............................. 5-34
What is Removable Memory Box? .... 5-34
What is Sub Address
Box/Polling Box? ............................... 5-34
Operating using Removable USB Memory ...... 5-35
Printing Documents Stored
in Removable USB Memory ............. 5-35
Saving Documents to USB Memory
(Scan to USB) ................................... 5-37
Check the USB Memory Information .... 5-38
Removing USB Memory ................... 5-38
5-2
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
Loading Originals
Load the originals on the platen or document processor, depending on the original size, type, volume, and function.
• Platen: Place the sheet, book, postcards, and envelopes.
• Document Processor: Place the multiple originals.
Placing Originals on the Platen
You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.
When you place envelopes or cardstock on the platen
NOTE
s
For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following:
Original Orientation (page 6-15)
NOTE
For the procedure for feeding envelopes or cardstock, refer to the following:
When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multipurpose tray (page 5-7)
CAUTION
Do not leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury.
IMPORTANT
• Do not push the document processor forcefully when you close it. Excessive pressure may crack the platen glass.
• When placing books or magazines on the machine, do so with the document processor in the open position.
2
1
1 Put the scanning side facedown.
2 Align it flush against the original
size indicator plates with the back
left corner as the reference point.
1 Put the scanning side facedown.
2 Align it flush against the original
size indicator plates with the back
left corner as the reference point.
2
1
5-3
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
Loading Originals in the Document Processor
The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals.
The document processor supports the following types of originals.
Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals. Otherwise, the originals may be jammed or the
document processor may become dirty.
• Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases before
loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)
• Originals with adhesive tape or glue
• Originals with cut-out sections
• Curled original
• Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)
• Carbon paper
• Crumpled paper
1Open the original table and then adjust the original width
guides.
Weight 50 to 160 g/m2
Sizes Maximum A4 (Legal) to Minimum A6 (Statement)
No. of sheets Plain paper (80 g/m2): 50 sheets (Mixed size originals: 30 sheets)
IMPORTANT
• Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. Originals left on
the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.
• Do not make an impact on the document processor top cover, such as aligning the originals on the top
cover. It may cause an error in the document processor.
5-4
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
2Place the originals.
1Put the side to be scanned face-up. Slide the leading edge into the document processor as
far as it will go.
2Open the original stopper to fit the size of the original set (Original size: Legal).
NOTE
For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following:
Original Orientation (page 6-15)
IMPORTANT
Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap,
readjust the original width guides. The gap may cause the originals to jam.
Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Exceeding the
maximum level may cause the originals to jam.
Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way
that the holes or perforations will be scanned last (not first).
5-5
Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray
For details of the supported paper sizes, refer to the following:
Choosing the Appropriate Paper (page 11-14)
For the paper type setting, refer to the following:
Media Type Setting (page 8-24)
Be sure to use the multipurpose tray when you print on any special paper.
The capacity of the multipurpose tray is as follows.
• Plain paper (80 g/m2) or recycled paper: 50 sheets
• Thick paper (209 g/m2): 15 sheets
• Thick paper (157 g/m2): 30 sheets
• Thick paper (104.7 g/m2): 50 sheets
• Hagaki (Cardstock): 15 sheets
• Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2:
5 sheets
• OHP film: 1 sheet
• Coated: 30 sheets
1Open the multipurpose tray.
IMPORTANT
• If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the
paper you are using.
• Remove each transparency from the inner tray as it is printed. Leaving transparencies in the inner tray may
cause a paper jam.
NOTE
• When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to the following:
Orig./Paper Set. (page 8-20)
• When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to the
following:
MP Tray Set. (Multipurpose Tray Settings) (page 8-23)
5-6
Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray
2Adjust the multipurpose tray size.
Paper sizes are marked on the multipurpose tray.
3Load paper.
Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops.
After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the
multipurpose tray.
4Specify the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose tray using
the operation panel.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)
IMPORTANT
• When loading the paper, keep the print side facing down.
• Curled paper must be uncurled before use.
• When loading paper into the multipurpose tray, check that there is no paper left
over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small
amount of paper left over in the multipurpose tray and you want to add more, first
remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before
loading the paper back into the tray.
• If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides
to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the load limits.
MP Tray Set. (Multipurpose Tray Settings) (page 8-23)
5-7
Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray
When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multipurpose tray
Load the paper with the print side facing up. For the procedure for printing, refer to the following:
Printer Driver User Guide
Example: When printing the address.
1 Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard)
2 Hagaki (Cardstocks)
3 Portrait form envelopes
4 Landscape form envelopes
IMPORTANT
• Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard).
• How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be sure to
load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
NOTE
When you load envelopes in the multipurpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to the following:
MP Tray Set. (Multipurpose Tray Settings) (page 8-23)
1234
5-8
Operation on the Machine > Program
Program
By registering sets of frequently used functions as a single program, you can simply select one of the [Program I] to
[Program IV] keys as needed to recall those functions.
The following functions are already registered in [Program I] key. This function allows you to copy the front and back
sides of ID card or other document that is smaller than Statement or A5/Statement size onto a single page. Although the
functions are deleted by overwriting [Program I] key, you can register the same settings using the [Function Menu] key.
• Paper Selection: Cassette 1
• Same size
• Combine: 2 in 1
• Original size: A5/Statement
• Continuous scanning: ON
Registering Programs
1Configure the settings of the functions.
Configure the settings of the functions you want to register in a program.
For the settings of functions, refer to the following:
NOTE
• It is possible to register the copy function, sending function and fax function in a program.
• If user login administration is enabled, you can only register functions by logging in with administrator privileges.
Using Various Functions (page 6-1)
NOTE
In the case of the sending function and fax function, a destination is also registered in the
program.
5-9
Operation on the Machine > Program
2Register the program.
Press the one of the [Program I] to [Program IV] keys where you want to register the settings
and hold it (2 seconds or more).
The current settings are registered to the selected program key.
Recalling Program
Select the one of the [Program I] to [Program IV] keys where the settings you want to recall are registered. The current
settings of various functions are replaced with the registered settings.
Place the originals and press the [Start] key.
5-10
Operation on the Machine > Program
Overwriting Program
1Configure the settings of the functions.
Set the function to change.
For the settings of functions, refer to the following:
.
2Overwrite the program.
1Press the one of the [Program I] to [Program IV] keys to change and hold it (2 seconds or
more).
2[▲] [] key > [Overwrite] > [OK] key > [Yes]
Register the changed program.
Deleting Program
1Display the screen.
Press the one of the [Program I] to [Program IV] keys to delete and hold it (2 seconds or
more).
2Delete the program.
[▲] [] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]
Using Various Functions (page 6-1)
NOTE
In the case of the sending function and fax function, a destination is also registered in the
program.
5-11
Operation on the Machine > Select Key Settings
Select Key Settings
Commonly used functions can be registered to the Select key. Functions can be easily configured by selecting the
Select key.
Functions can be registered in Select keys from the system menu.
Copy (page 8-32)
Send (page 8-35)
Document Box (page 8-36)
5-12
Operation on the Machine > Copying
Copying
The procedures here represent the basic copy operation and how to cancel the copy.
Basic Operation
1Select the [Copy] key.
2Place the originals.
Check the original size and the paper size.
Loading Originals (page 5-2)
NOTE
For selecting the original size, refer to the following:
Original Size (page 6-15)
For selecting the paper source, refer to the following:
Paper Selection (page 6-8)
Ready to copy.
A4 A4
1
Zoom Paper
Copies
100%
:
1 Original size
2 Paper size
12
5-13
Operation on the Machine > Copying
3Select the color mode.
To make more detailed settings, refer to the following:
4Select the functions.
Select the [Function Menu] key to select the copier functions to use.
5Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity.
Specify the desired number up to 999.
6Press the [Start] key.
Copying begins.
Canceling Jobs
1Select the [Stop] key with the copy screen displayed.
2Cancel a job.
1[▲] [] key > [Cancel Print Job] > [OK] key
2Select the job to cancel, and [Menu].
3[▲] [] key > [Cancel Job] > [OK] key
4Select [Yes].
The job is canceled.
Full Color Scans all documents in full color.
Black & White Scans all documents in black & white.
Color Selection (page 6-19)
Copy (page 6-3)
NOTE
Select [Detail] and the [OK] key to show the detailed information of the job.
NOTE
During scanning, the job can be canceled by selecting the [Stop] key or [Cancel].
5-14
Operation on the Machine > Frequently-Used Sending Method
Frequently-Used Sending Method
This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment of an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. In
order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network.
A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required in order to send E-mail. It is
recommended that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues.
Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following four options are available.
• Send as E-mail (E-mail Addr Entry): Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.
Sending Document via E-mail (page 5-15)
• Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC.
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) (page 5-16)
• Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server.
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) (page 5-18)
• Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program.
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA (page 5-20)
NOTE
• Different sending options can be specified in combination.
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) (page 5-25)
• The fax function can be used with the machine.
FAX Operation Guide
5-15
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document via E-mail
Sending Document via E-mail
When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.
Primary Network (page 8-16)
Configuring Settings before Sending
Before sending an E-mail, configure the SMTP and E-mail settings using the Command Center RX.
E-mail Settings (page 2-51)
Sending Scanned Document via E-mail
1Select the [Send] key.
2Place the originals.
3[▲] [▼] key > [E-mail] > [OK] key
4Enter destination E-mail address > [OK] key
Up to 128 characters can be entered.
To enter multiple destinations, select [Confirm/Add Destination] key and enter the next
destination. Up to 100 E-mail addresses can be specified.
Destinations can be changed later.
5Select the functions.
Select the [Function Menu] key to select the send functions to use.
6Press the [Start] key.
Sending starts.
Loading Originals (page 5-2)
Character Entry Method (page 11-8)
Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-32)
Send (page 6-4)
5-16
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
Sending Document to Desired Shared
Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
Configuring Settings before Sending
Before sending an document, configure the following settings.
• Make a note of the computer name and full computer name
• Make a note of the user name and domain name
• Create a shared folder and make a note of a shared folder
• Configure the Windows firewall
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a
Computer
1Select the [Send] key.
2Place the originals.
3[▲] [▼] key > [Folder(SMB)] > [OK] key
4Enter the destination information.
Enter the information for each item and select the [OK] key.
Making a note of the computer name and full computer name (page 3-10)
Making a note of the user name and domain name (page 3-11)
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder (page 3-12)
Configuring Windows Firewall (page 3-15)
Loading Originals (page 5-2)
Character Entry Method (page 11-8)
5-17
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
The table below lists the items to be set.
5Check the status.
The connection confirmation screen appears. Select [Yes] to check the connection and [No] to
not check it.
"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If "Cannot
connect." appears, review the entry.
To send to multiple destinations, repeat steps 3 to 4.
Destinations can be changed later.
6Select the functions.
Select the [Function Menu] key to select the send functions to use.
7Press the [Start] key.
Sending starts.
Item Detail Max.
characters
Host Name *1
*1 You can also specify the port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon.
"Host name: port number" or "IP address: port number"
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]:445)
If the port number is not specified, the default port number is 445.
Computer name Up to
64 characters
Path Share name
For example:
scannerdata
If saving in a folder in the shared folder:
share name\folder name in shared folder
Up to
128 characters
Login User Name If the computer name and domain name are the same:
User Name
For example: james.smith
If the computer name and domain name are different:
Domain name\User name
For example: abcdnet\james.smith
Up to
64 characters
Login Password Windows logon password
(Case sensitive.)
Up to
64 characters
Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-32)
Send (page 6-4)
5-18
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP
Server (Scan to FTP)
Configuring Settings before Sending
Before sending an document, configure the FTP Client (Transmission).
ProtocolSettings (page 8-12)
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server
1Select the [Send] key.
2Place the originals.
3[▲] [▼] key > [Folder(FTP)] > [OK] key
Loading Originals (page 5-2)
5-19
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)
4Enter the destination information.
Enter the information for each item and select the [OK] key.
The table below lists the items to be set.
5Check the status.
The connection confirmation screen appears. Select [Yes] to check the connection and [No] to
not check it.
"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If "Cannot
connect." appears, review the entry.
To send to multiple destinations, repeat steps 3 to 4.
Destinations can be changed later.
6Select the functions.
Select the [Function Menu] key to select the send functions to use.
7Press the [Start] key.
Sending starts.
Character Entry Method (page 11-8)
Item Data to be entered Max.
characters
Host Name *1
*1 You can also specify the port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon.
"Host name: port number" or "IP address: port number"
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]:21)
If the port number is not specified in [Host Name], the default port number is 21.
Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to
64 characters
Path*2
*2 When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is combined by the
slash "/" not using the back-slash.
Path to the receiving folder
For example: User\ScanData
Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory.
Up to
128 characters
Login User Name FTP server login user name Up to
64 characters
Login Password FTP server login password
(Case sensitive.)
Up to
64 characters
Checking and Editing Destinations (page 5-31)
Send (page 6-4)
5-20
Operation on the Machine > Scanning using TWAIN or WIA
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA
Configuring Settings before Sending
Before sending an document, confirm that TWAIN/WIA driver is installed on a computer and the settings are configured.
Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-40)
Setting WIA Driver (page 2-42)
Scanning Document Using Application
This subsection explains how to scan an original using TWAIN. The WIA driver is used in the same way.
1Display the screen.
1Activate the TWAIN compatible application software.
2Select the machine using the application and display the dialog box.
2Configure the scan settings.
Select scanning settings in the dialog box that opens.
3Place the originals.
4Scan the originals.
Click the [Scan] button. The document data is scanned.
NOTE
For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application
software.
NOTE
For the settings, refer to Help in the dialog box.
Loading Originals (page 5-2)
5-21
Operation on the Machine > Useful Sending Method
Useful Sending Method
You can specify the following useful scanning (sending) methods.
• WSD Scan: Saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.
WSD Scan (page 5-22)
• Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending): Sends to different types of destination (E-mail addresses,
folders, etc.) in a single operation.
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) (page 5-25)
• Send to Me (E-mail): Sends to the E-mail address of the logged in user when user login is enabled.
Send to Me (E-mail) (page 5-26)
5-22
Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan
WSD Scan
WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.
Installing Driver Software
In Windows 8, Windows 8.1 and Microsoft Windows Server 2012
1Click [Search] in charms, [Control Panel], and then [View
devices and printers].
2Install the driver.
Click [Add a device]. Select the machine's icon and then click [Next].
When the machine's icon is displayed in "Printers" on the [Devices and Printers] screen, the
installation is completed.
In Windows 7
1Display [Network] in the Start menu.
Click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [Network].
2Install the driver.
Right-click the machine's icon and then click [Install].
During the installation, double-click the icon shown on the task bar to display the "Driver
Software Installation" screen. When "Your devices are ready to use" is displayed on the
[Driver Software Installation] screen, the installation is completed.
NOTE
• To use WSD Scan, confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network-connected, and
"WSD Scan" is set to [On] in the network settings.
WSD-SCAN (page 8-15)
• For information on operating the computer, refer to the computer's help or the operation guide of your software.
NOTE
When [Network] does not appear in the Start menu, perform the following procedure.
1Right-click [Start] and click [Property] in the menu that appears.
2Select the [[Start] menu] tab in the "Task bar and [Start] menu properties" screen, and
click [Customize].
3When the "Customize [Start] menu" screen appears, select the "Network" check box
and click [OK].
NOTE
If the "User Account Control" window appears, click [Continue].
If the "Found New Hardware" window appears, click [Cancel].
5-23
Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan
For Windows 10
1Right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [Control
Panel] and then [View devices and printer].
2Install the driver.
Click [Add a device]. Select the machine's icon and then click [Next].
When the machine's icon is displayed in "Printers" on the [Devices and Printers] screen, the
installation is completed.
WSD scan
1Select the [Send] key.
2Place the originals.
3Display the screen.
[▲] [▼] key > [WSD Scan] > [OK] key
Loading Originals (page 5-2)
5-24
Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan
4Scan the originals.
Procedure using this machine
1[▲] [▼] key > [From Oper. Panel] > [OK] key
2Select the destination computer, and select the [OK] key.
You can view information on the selected computer by selecting [Detail].
3Select the [Function Menu] key to set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.
4Press the [Start] key.
Sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated.
Procedure from Your Computer
1[▲] [▼] key > [From Computer] > [OK] key
2Use the software installed on the computer to send the images.
5-25
Operation on the Machine > Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)
Sending to Different Types of Destinations
(Multi Sending)
You can specify destinations that combine E-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP) and fax numbers. This is referred to
as Multi Sending. This is useful for sending to different types of destination (E-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in a single
operation.
No. of broadcast items: Up to 100
However, number of items are restricted for the following sending options.
Folders (SMP, FTP): Total of 5 SMB and FTP
Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail address or
folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the [Start] key to start transmission to all destinations at one
time.
NOTE
If the destinations include a fax, the images sent to all destinations will be black and white.
5-26
Operation on the Machine > Send to Me (E-mail)
Send to Me (E-mail)
When user login is enabled, the document is sent to the E-mail address of the logged in user.
Sending a document to the mail address of the logged
in user
1In the basic screen for sending, select [▲] [▼] key >
[Me(E-mail)] > [OK] key
NOTE
• To use this function, user control must be set to network authentication and the e-mail address of the user must be
registered in the network authentication server.
• For the procedure for setting an e-mail address, check with the administrator for network authentication server
users.
NOTE
If the e-mail address is not registered in the network authentication server, e-mail cannot be
sent.
5-27
Operation on the Machine > Canceling Sending Jobs
Canceling Sending Jobs
1Select the [Stop] key with the send screen displayed.
The [Job Cancel List] menu appears.
2Cancel jobs.
1[▲] [▼] key > [Cancel Send Job] > [OK] key
2Select the job to cancel, and [Menu].
3[▲] [▼] key > [Cancel Job] > [OK] key
4Select [Yes].
The job is canceled.
NOTE
Selecting the [
Stop
] key will not temporarily stop a job that you have already started sending.
NOTE
Select [Detail] and the [OK] key to show the detailed information of the job.
NOTE
During scanning, the job can be canceled by selecting the [Stop] key or [Cancel].
5-28
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Handling Destination
This section explains how to select and confirm the destination.
Specifying Destination
Select the destination using either of the following methods except entering address directly:
• Choosing from the Address Book
• Choosing from the External Address Book
For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:
• Choosing from One Touch key.
• Choosing from the FAX
Choosing from the Address Book
Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 3-20)
1In the basic screen for sending, select the [Address Book] key.
2Select the destinations.
1[▲] [] key > [Address Book] > [OK] key
2Select the destination.
Choosing from the Address Book (page 5-28)
Command Center RX User Guide
Choosing from the One Touch Key (page 5-30)
FAX Operation Guide
NOTE
• You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you select the [Send] key.
Default Screen (page 8-35)
• You can specify the fax destination. Enter the other party number using the numeric keypad.
NOTE
For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:
Command Center RX User Guide
NOTE
When checking information of the destination, select [Menu] > [Details] > [OK] key
5-29
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Destination Search
The destination can be searched by name.
1[Menu] > [▲] [] key > [Search (Name)] > [OK] key
2Enter characters to search using the numeric keys.
3Select the [OK] key.
The searched destination is displayed.
3Select the [OK] key.
To send to multiple destinations, repeat steps 1 to 3. You can send to as many as 100
destinations at once.
Destinations can be changed later.
Choosing from the External Address Book
1Display the screen.
1In the basic screen for sending, select[Address Book] key [Menu] > [▲] [▼] key >
[Switch Addr Book] > [OK] key
2[▲] [▼] key > Select external address book > [OK] key
2Select the destinations.
1Select the destination.
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (page 11-8)
Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-32)
NOTE
For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:
Command Center RX User Guide
NOTE
When checking information of the destination, select [Menu] > [Details] > [OK] key
5-30
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Destination Search
The destination can be searched by name.
1[Menu] > [▲] [] key > [Search (Name)] > [OK] key
2Enter characters to search using the numeric keys.
3Select the [OK] key.
The searched destination is displayed.
3Select the [OK] key.
To send to multiple destinations, repeat steps 1 to 3. You can send to as many as 100
destinations at once.
Destinations can be changed later.
Choosing from the One Touch Key
In the basic screen for sending, select the One Touch Keys where the destination is registered.
When selecting One Touch Key numbers 12 to 22, the One touch Key needs to be selected after switching on the [Shift
Lock] indicator by selecting the [Shift Lock] key.
Destinations can be changed later.
Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-32)
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (page 11-8)
Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-32)
NOTE
This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have already been registered.
For more information on adding One Touch keys, refer to the following:
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-27)
5-31
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Checking and Editing Destinations
1Display the screen.
Specify the destination.
2Check and edit the destination.
Select the [Confirm/Add Destination] key.
Add the destination
1Select [Add].
2Set the destinations to be added.
Edit the destination
1Select the destination you want to edit, and select the [OK] key.
2[▲] [▼] key > [Detail/Edit] > [OK] key
3Edit the destinations > [OK] key
Delete the destination
1Select the destination you want to delete, and select the [OK] key.
2[▲] [▼] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]
3Select [Exit].
Specifying Destination (page 5-28)
Specifying Destination (page 5-28)
Specifying Destination (page 5-28)
NOTE
To edit a destination registered in the address book or a One Touch Key, refer to the
following:
Editing Address Book Entries (page 3-25)
Editing One Touch Key (page 3-28)
NOTE
When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send, the confirmation screen appears
after pressing the [Start] key.
Check beforeSend (page 8-35)
Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-32)
5-32
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Confirmation Screen of Destinations
When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send, the confirmation screen of destinations appears after pressing
the [Start] key.
DestinationCheck (page 8-35)
1Confirm all destination.
To show the detailed information of the destination, select the destination and [OK] key >
[▲][▼]key> [Detail] > [OK] key
To delete the destination, select the destination you want to delete and [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >
[Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]
The destination is deleted.
2Select [Next].
Recall
Recall is a function allowing you to send the last entered destination once again. When you want to send the image to
the same destination, select the [Address Recall/Pause] key, and you can call the destination you sent on the
destination list.
1Select the [Address Recall/Pause] key.
The destination you sent is displayed on the destination list.
2Press the [Start] key.
Sending starts.
NOTE
Be sure to confirm all destination by displaying them on the message display. You cannot
select [Next] unless you have confirmed all destination.
NOTE
When the last sending included FAX, folders and E-mail destinations, they are also
displayed. If necessary, add or delete the destination.
NOTE
• When [On] is selected in "Check beforeSend", a destination confirmation screen is
displayed when you press the [Start] key.
Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-32)
• Recall information is canceled in the following conditions.
- When you turn the power off
- When you send a next image (new recall information is registered)
- When you log out
5-33
Operation on the Machine > How to use the FAX Function
How to use the FAX Function
It is possible to use the FAX function.
FAX Operation Guide
5-34
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
Using Document Boxes
The available Document Boxes are as follows: Job Box, removal USB memory, Subaddress Box, and Polling Box.
What is Job Box?
Job Box is a generic name for the "Private Print/Stored Job Box" and "Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box". These Job
Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user.
What is Removable Memory Box?
A USB memory stick can be connected to the USB memory slot on the machine to print a saved file. You can print data
directly from the USB memory without a PC. Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB memory
in the PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS or high compression PDF format (Scan to USB).
What is Sub Address Box/Polling Box?
Sub Address Box/Polling Box store the fax data.
FAX Operation Guide
NOTE
• To use the Stored Job Box and the Quick Copy Box, an SD/SDHC memory card must be installed in the device.
• To use the Private Print Box and the Proof and Hold Box, an expansion memory or SD/SDHC memory card must be
installed in the device.
• You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted.
JobRet. Deletion (page 8-36)
• For details on operating the Job Box, refer to the following:
Printing Data Saved in the Printer (page 4-10)
IMPORTANT
Unencrypted data is saved on the SD/SDHC memory card.
Exercise caution when saving sensitive documents.
5-35
Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory
Operating using Removable USB Memory
Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB
memory without having to use a computer.
The following file types can be printed:
• PDF file (Version 1.7 or older)
• TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)
• JPEG file
• XPS file
• OpenXPS file
• Encrypted PDF file
In addition, you can store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine.
The following file types can be stored:
• PDF file format
• TIFF file format
• JPEG file format
• XPS file format
• OpenXPS file format
• High-compression PDF file format
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB
Memory
1Plug the USB memory.
Plug the USB memory into the USB Memory Slot.
NOTE
• PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).
• Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.
• Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine.
• Plug the USB memory directly into the USB Memory Slot.
5-36
Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory
2Display the screen.
[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [▼] key > [USB Memory] > [OK] key
3Print the document.
1Select the folder containing the file to be printed, and select the [OK] key.
The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.
2Select the document you want to print, and [Select].
A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.
Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.
3[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Print] > [OK] key
4Change the number of copies, duplex printing, etc. as desired.
For the features that can be selected, refer to the following:
5Press the [Start] key.
Printing of the selected file begins.
NOTE
• 1,000 documents can be displayed.
• To return to a higher level folder, select the [Back] key.
NOTE
Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.
•[Select All]: Select all files.
•[Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.
•[Detail]: Display the details for the selected file.
•[Memory Detail]: Display the detail for the USB memory.
•[Remove Memory]: Remove the USB memory.
Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) (page 6-5)
5-37
Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)
1Place the originals.
2Plug the USB memory.
Plug the USB memory into the USB Memory Slot.
3Display the screen.
[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [▼] key > [USB Memory] > [OK] key
NOTE
The maximum number of the storable files is 1,000.
Loading Originals (page 5-2)
5-38
Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory
4Store the document.
1Select the folder where the file will be stored, and the [OK] key.
The machine will display the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.
2[▲] [▼] key > [Store File] > [OK] key
3Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.
For the features that can be set, refer to the following:
4Press the [Start] key.
The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB memory.
Check the USB Memory Information
1Display the screen.
[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [▼] key > [USB Memory] > [OK] key > [Menu] >
[▲][▼]key> [Memory Detail] > [OK] key
2Check the information.
Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen.
Once you confirm the information, select the [OK] key.
Removing USB Memory
1Display the screen.
[Reset] key > [▲] [▼] key > [USB Memory] > [OK] key
2Select [Remove Memory].
[Menu] > [▲] [▼] key > [Remove Memory] > [OK] key
3Remove the USB memory.
When "USB memory can be safely removed." is displayed, select [OK] and then remove the
USB memory.
Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) (page 6-5)
IMPORTANT
Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory.
NOTE
USB memory can also be removed after checking the status of the device.
Device/Communication (page 7-14)
6-1
6
Using Various Functions
This chapter explains the following topics:
Functions Available on the Machine .................................................................................................................. 6-2
About Functions Available on the Machine .............................................................................................. 6-2
How to Select Functions .......................................................................................................................... 6-2
Copy ........................................................................................................................................................ 6-3
Send ........................................................................................................................................................ 6-4
Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) ............................................................................. 6-5
Functions ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-7
Paper Selection ....................................................................................................................................... 6-8
Collate ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-9
Duplex ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-9
Zoom ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-11
Combine ................................................................................................................................................ 6-13
Original Size .......................................................................................................................................... 6-15
Original Orientation ................................................................................................................................ 6-15
Mixed Size Originals .............................................................................................................................. 6-16
Original Image ....................................................................................................................................... 6-16
Density ................................................................................................................................................... 6-17
EcoPrint ................................................................................................................................................. 6-17
Continuous Scan ................................................................................................................................... 6-17
File Name Entry ..................................................................................................................................... 6-18
Job Finish Notice ................................................................................................................................... 6-18
Priority Override ..................................................................................................................................... 6-18
Color Selection ...................................................................................................................................... 6-19
Color Balance ........................................................................................................................................ 6-19
Sharpness .............................................................................................................................................. 6-20
Contrast ................................................................................................................................................. 6-20
Background Density Adj. (Background Density Adjustment) ................................................................. 6-21
Saturation .............................................................................................................................................. 6-21
Skip Blank Page .................................................................................................................................... 6-22
Scan Resolution ..................................................................................................................................... 6-22
Sending Size .......................................................................................................................................... 6-23
File Format ............................................................................................................................................. 6-24
Subject/Body .......................................................................................................................................... 6-28
FTP Encrypted TX ................................................................................................................................. 6-28
File Separation ....................................................................................................................................... 6-28
Storing Size ............................................................................................................................................ 6-29
Encrypted PDF ...................................................................................................................................... 6-29
JPEG/TIFF Print .................................................................................................................................... 6-30
XPS Fit to Page ..................................................................................................................................... 6-30
6-2
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Functions Available on the Machine
About Functions Available on the Machine
This machine provides the various functions available.
How to Select Functions
To configure the settings for functions, select the [Function Menu] key.
1 Displays the function menu.
2 Selects the item displayed or
changes the numeric value.
3 Confirms the selected setting.
4 Cancels the current menu setting to
return to the menu one level higher.
Operation Method (page 2-13)
1
23
4
6-3
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Copy
For details on each function, see the table below.
Key Function Description Reference
page
Paper Selection Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that contains
the required paper size.
page 6-8
Collate Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-9
Duplex Produces two-sided prints. page 6-9
Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-11
Combine Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page. page 6-13
Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. page 6-15
Orig. Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top
edge to scan correct direction.
page 6-15
Mixed Size Originals Scan the documents of different sizes that are set in
the document processor all at once.
page 6-16
Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-16
Density Adjust density. page 6-17
EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. page 6-17
Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate batches
and then produce as one job.
page 6-17
File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-18
JobFinish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-18
Priority Override Suspends the current job and gives a new job top
priority.
page 6-18
Color Selection Select the color mode setting. page 6-19
Color Balance Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and
black.
page 6-19
Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-20
Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and dark
areas of the image.
page 6-20
Backgrnd Density Removes dark background from originals, such as
newspapers.
page 6-21
Saturation Adjust the color saturation of the image. page 6-21
Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned document,
this function skips the blank pages and prints only
pages that are not blank.
page 6-22
6-4
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Send
For details on each function, see the table below.
Key Function Description Reference
page
Color Selection Select the color mode setting. page 6-19
Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. page 6-15
Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-16
Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. page 6-22
Sending Size Select size of image to be sent. page 6-23
Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-11
Orig. Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top
edge to scan correct direction.
page 6-15
Mixed Size Originals Scan the documents of different sizes that are set in
the document processor all at once.
page 6-16
Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate
batches and then produce as one job.
page 6-17
File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level
can also be adjusted.
page 6-24
File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-18
Subject/Body Adds subject and body when sending a document. page 6-28
JobFinish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-18
FAX Resolution Select fineness of images when sending FAX. Refer to the
FAX
Operation
Guide.
FAX Delayed TX Set a send time.
FAX Direct TX Sends FAX directly without reading original data
into memory.
FAX RX Polling Dial the destination and receive documents for
Polling Transmission stored in the polling box.
FAX TX Report Print a report of fax transmission results.
Density Adjust density. page 6-17
FTP Encrypted TX Encrypts images when sending via FTP. page 6-28
File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original
data page by page, and sends the files.
page 6-28
Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-20
Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and dark
areas of the image.
page 6-20
Backgrnd Density Removes dark background from originals, such as
newspapers.
page 6-21
Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned
document, this function skips the blank pages and
prints only pages that are not blank.
page 6-22
6-5
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents)
For details on each function, see the table below.
Store File
Key Function Description Reference
page
Color Selection Select the color mode setting. page 6-19
Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. page 6-15
Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-16
Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. page 6-22
Storing Size Select size of image to be stored. page 6-29
Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-11
Orig. Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top
edge to scan correct direction.
page 6-15
Mixed Size Originals Scan the documents of different sizes that are set in
the document processor all at once.
page 6-16
Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate
batches and then produce as one job.
page 6-17
File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level
can also be adjusted.
page 6-24
File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original
data page by page, and sends the files.
page 6-28
File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-18
JobFinish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-18
Density Adjust density. page 6-17
Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-20
Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and dark
areas of the image.
page 6-20
Backgrnd Density Removes dark background from originals, such as
newspapers.
page 6-21
Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned
document, this function skips the blank pages and
prints only pages that are not blank.
page 6-22
6-6
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Printing Documents
Key Function Description Reference
page
Collate Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-9
Paper Selection Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that
contains the required paper size.
page 6-8
Duplex Print a document on both sides of the paper. page 6-10
EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. page 6-17
File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-18
JobFinish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-18
Priority Override Suspends the current job and gives a new job top
priority.
page 6-18
Color Selection Select the color mode setting. page 6-19
Encrypted PDF Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF
data.
page 6-29
JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF
files.
page 6-30
XPS Fit to Page Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the
selected paper size when printing XPS file.
page 6-30
6-7
Using Various Functions > Functions
Functions
On pages that explain a convenient function, the modes in which that function can be used are indicated by icons.
Printing:
Sending:
Storing:
Copy
Print from
USB
Send
Scan to
USB
6-8
Using Various Functions > Functions
Paper Selection
Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that contains the required paper size.
If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically.
Before selecting [MP Tray], you need to select [MP Tray Set.] and specify the paper size and media type. The available
paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.
NOTE
• Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette.
Cassette 1 (2) Set. (Cassette 1 (2) Settings) (page 8-23)
MP Tray Set. (Multipurpose Tray Settings) (page 8-23)
• Cassette 2 is displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.
Item Value Description
Auto The paper matching the size of the
original is selected automatically.
Cassette 1 (2) *1
*1 Cassette 2 is displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.
Feed paper from cassette 1 (2).
MP Tray Feed paper from the multipurpose tray.
MP Tray Set. ―Before selecting [MP Tray], you need to
select [MP Tray Set.] and specify the
paper size and media type.
Standard Size A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter,
Legal, Statement-R, Statement, Executive, Oficio II,
16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9,
Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,
Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock),
Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2,
Custom*2
*2 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper sizes, refer to the following:
Custom PaperSize (page 8-21)
Select from the standard sizes and
custom size.
Size Entry
Set the sizes of [
Y
] (vertical).
Metric: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)
Enter the size not included in the
standard size.*3
When you have selected [Size Entry],
use [▲]/[▼] or the numeric keys to set
the sizes of "X" (horizontal) and "Y"
(vertical).
*3 The input units can be changed in System Menu.
Measurement (page 8-24)
Set the sizes of [
X
] (horizontal).
Metric: 70 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch: 2.76 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)
Media Type Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Transparency, Rough,
Vellum (60 to 220 g/m2), Labels, Recycled,
Preprinted*4, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched*4,
Letterhead*4, Envelope, Thick (106 to 220 g/m2),
Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8*4
*4 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to the following:
Media Type Setting (page 8-24)
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following:
SpecialPaper Act. (page 8-22)
Select the media type.
Displayed after [Standard Size] or [Size
Entry] is set in [MP Tray Set.].
Copy
Print from
USB
6-9
Using Various Functions > Functions
Collate
Offsets the output by page or set.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Duplex
Produces two-sided prints.
The following modes are available.
One-sided to Two-sided
NOTE
• You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default.
MP Tray Set. (Multipurpose Tray Settings) (page 8-23)
• If the specified size of paper is not loaded in the paper source cassette or multipurpose tray, a confirmation screen
appears. Load the required paper in the multipurpose tray and select [
OK
] to start copying.
Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In case of an odd
number of originals, the back side of the last copy will be blank.
The following binding options are available.
A Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated.
B Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees.
Copies can be bound on the top edge, facing the same orientation
when turning the pages.
Copy
Print from
USB
Copy
Print from
USB
Original Copy
ghi
def
abc
ghi
abc
def
ghi
abc
def
Original Copy
AB
6-10
Using Various Functions > Functions
Copying
Prints 1-sided originals to 2-sided. Select the binding orientation for original and finished documents.
When placing the original on the platen, consecutively replace each original and press the [Start] key.
After scanning all originals, select [End Scan] to start copying.
Printing
Print a document on both sides of the paper.
Item Value Description
1-sided>>1-sided ―Disables the function.
1-sided>>2-sided ―Select the [OK] key to copy the original with the default setting.
For the default settings, refer to the following:
Function Defaults (page 8-28)
Finish. Binding Left/Right, Top Select [Detail] to display the [Finish. Binding] screen.
Select the binding orientation of copies, and select the [OK] key.
Orig. Orientation Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.
Choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on
Left]. Then select the [OK] key.
Item Value Description
1-sided ―Disables the function.
2-sided ―Select the [OK] key to print a 2-sided document with the default setting.
For the default settings, refer to the following:
Function Defaults (page 8-28)
Finish. Binding Left/Right, Top Select [Detail] to display the [Finish. Binding] screen.
Select the binding orientation of copies, and select the [OK] key.
6-11
Using Various Functions > Functions
Zoom
Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.
Copying
The following zoom options are available.
Auto
Adjusts the image to match the paper size.
Standard Zoom
Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.*1
*1 LTR=Letter
LGL=Legal
STMT=Statement
FOL=Folio
Others
Reduces or enlarges at magnifications other than the Standard Zoom.*1
*1 LTR=Letter
LGL=Legal
STMT=Statement
FOL=Folio
Model Zoom Level (Original Copy) Model Zoom Level (Original Copy)
Metric Models 400%
200%
141% A5 >> A4
115% B5 >> A4
100%
90% FOL >> A4
86% A4 >> B5
70% A4 >> A5
50%
25%
Inch Models 400%
200%
129% STMT>>LTR
100%
78% LGL>>LTR
64% LTR>>STMT
50%
25%
Model Zoom Level (Original Copy) Model Zoom Level (Original Copy)
Metric Models 129% STMT>>LTR
78% LGL>>LTR
64% LTR>>STMT
Inch Models 141% A5 >> A4
115% B5 >> A4
90% FOL>>A4
86% A4 >> B5
70% A4 >> A5
Copy
Send
Scan to
USB
A5
A4: 141%
A6: 70%
6-12
Using Various Functions > Functions
Zoom Entry
Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1% increments between 25% and 400%. Use the numeric keys or
select [▲] or [▼] to enter the any magnification.
Sending/Storing
Item Description
100% Reproduces the original size.
Auto Reduces or enlarges original to sending/storing size.
NOTE
To reduce or enlarge the image, select the paper size, sending size, or storing size.
Paper Selection (page 6-8)
Sending Size (page 6-23)
Storing Size (page 6-29)
6-13
Using Various Functions > Functions
Combine
Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page.
You can select the page layout and the type of boundary lines around the pages.
The following types of the boundary lines are available.
Select [2 in 1] or [4 in 1], select [Detail], and configure the function.
Item Value Description
Off ―Disables the function.
2 in 1 ―Select the [OK] key to copy the original with the default setting. For the default
settings, refer to the following:
Function Defaults (page 8-28)
2 in 1 Layout L to R T to B,
R to L, B to T
Select the page layout of scanned originals, and select the [OK] key.
Border Line None, Solid Line,
Dotted Line,
Positioning Mark
Select the page boundary line, and select the [OK] key.
Orig. Orientation Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.
Choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on
Left]. Then select the [OK] key.
4 in 1 ―Select the [OK] key to copy the original with the default setting. For the default
settings, refer to the following:
Function Defaults (page 8-28)
4 in 1 Layout Right then Down,
Down then Right,
Left then Down,
Down then Left
Select the page layout of scanned originals, and select the [OK] key.
Border Line None, Solid Line,
Dotted Line,
Positioning Mark
Select the page boundary line, and select the [OK] key.
Orig. Orientation Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.
Choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on
Left]. Then select the [OK] key.
Copy
None Dotted LineSolid Line Positioning Mark
6-14
Using Various Functions > Functions
Layout image
Item Image
2 in 1 L to R/T to B
R to L/B to T
4 in 1 Right then Down
Left then Down
Down then Right
Down then Left
NOTE
• The paper sizes supported in Combine mode: A4, A5-R, B5, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement, Oficio II,
16K
• When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.
6-15
Using Various Functions > Functions
Original Size
Specify the original size to be scanned.
Original Orientation
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.
To use any of the following functions, the document's original orientation must be set.
•Duplex
• Combine
Select original orientation from [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Item Description
Auto (DP)*1, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm,
Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, 16K, ISO B5,
Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,
Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard),
Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom*2
*1 This function is displayed when [Auto Detect] in [Detect Orig.(DP)] is set to [On].
Detect Orig.(DP) (page 8-20)
*2 For instructions on how to specify the custom original size, refer to the following:
Custom Orig. Size (page 8-20)
Select from standard sizes and custom size.
NOTE
Be sure to always specify the original size when using custom size original.
Item Image
Top Edge on Top
Top Edge on Left
NOTE
The default setting for Original Orientation can be changed.
Original Orientation (page 8-28)
Copy
Send
Scan to
USB
Copy
Send
Scan to
USB
Original Original orientation
Original Original orientation
6-16
Using Various Functions > Functions
Mixed Size Originals
Scan the documents of different sizes that are set in the document processor all at once.
This function cannot be used if platen is used.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Supported Combinations of Originals
Legal and Letter (Folio and A4)
Original Image
Select original image type for best results.
Copying
Sending/Storing
Item Description
Text+Photo*1
*1 If gray text is not printed completely using [Text + Photo], selecting [Text] may improve the result.
Best for mixed text and photo documents.
Photo Best for photos taken with a camera.
Text Best for documents that are mostly text.
Graphic/Map Best for graphics and maps.
Printed Document Best for documents printed on this machine originally.
Item Description
Text+Photo Best for mixed text and photo documents.
Photo Best for photos taken with a camera.
Text Best for documents that are mostly text.
For OCR*1
*1 This function is only available when "Color Selection" is set to [Black & White]. For details, refer to the following:
Color Selection (page 6-19)
Scanning produces an image that is suitable for OCR.
Light Text/Fine Line Clearly reproduces faint characters written in pencil, etc., and thin lines on map originals or diagrams.
Copy
Send
Scan to
USB
Copy
Send
Scan to
USB
6-17
Using Various Functions > Functions
Density
Adjust density.
(Value: [-4] to [+4] (Lighter to Darker))
EcoPrint
EcoPrint saves toner when printing.
Use this function for test prints or any other occasion when high quality print is not required.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Continuous Scan
Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job.
Originals will be scanned continuously until you select [End Scan].
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Copy
Send
Scan to
USB
Copy
Print from
USB
Copy
Send
Scan to
USB
1~10
1
1~30
1
11~20
11
21~30
21
6-18
Using Various Functions > Functions
File Name Entry
Adds a file name.
Additional information such as job number and date and time can also be set. You can check a job history or job status
using the file name, date and time, or job number specified here.
Enter the file name (up to 32 characters), and select [OK].
To add date and time, select [Date] and the [OK] key. To add job number, select [Job No.] and the [OK] key. To add
both, select [Job No. + Date] or [Date + Job No.] and the [OK] key.
Job Finish Notice
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete.
Users can be notified of the completion of a job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the
machine to finish.
Priority Override
Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority.
The suspended job resumes after the other job is finished.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
NOTE
PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.
Command Center RX (page 2-45)
E-mail can be sent to a single destination.
Item Description
Off Disables the function.
On Address Book Select the notification destination from the Address Book or External Address Book*1.
Select the destination on the Address Book or Ext Address Book screen, then select the [OK] key.
*1 For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:
Command Center RX User Guide
Address Entry Enter E-mail address directly. Enter the address (up to 128 characters) and select the [OK] key.
NOTE
• This function is not available if current job was an override.
• Priority override may not be available depending on the status of the current print job and memory usage.
Copy
Print from
USB
Send
Scan to
USB
Copy
Print from
USB
Send
Scan to
USB
Copy
Print from
USB
6-19
Using Various Functions > Functions
Color Selection
Select the color mode setting.
Copying/Printing
Sending/Storing
Color Balance
Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.
Example:
Item Description
Full Color Prints documents in full color.
Black & White Prints documents in black and white.
Item Description
Full Color Scans the document in full color.
Grayscale Scans the document in grayscale. Produces a smooth, detailed image.
Black & White Scans the document in black and white.
Item Value Description
Off
On Cyan -5 to 5 Select the [▲] or [▼] key to select the intensity of the
color. A large negative value makes the color weaker, and
a large positive value makes the color stronger.
Magenta
Yellow
Black
NOTE
This feature is used with full color and auto color copying.
Copy
Send
Print from
USB
Scan to
USB
Copy
More MagentaOriginalLess Magenta
6-20
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.
When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward
"Sharpen". When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos, in which moire*1 patterns
appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward "Blur".
Contrast
You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of the image.
Item Description
[1] to [3] (Sharpen) Emphasizes the image outline.
[-1] to [-3] (Blur) Blurs the image outline. Can weaken a Moire*1 effect.
*1 Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.
Item Description
[1] to [4] Increases the sharpness of colors.
[-1] to [-4] Creates smoother colors.
Copy
Send
Scan to
USB
Original More SharpLess Sharp
Copy
Send
Scan to
USB
Original HigherLower
6-21
Using Various Functions > Functions
Background Density Adj. (Background Density
Adjustment)
Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers.
This feature is used with full color and auto color.
Saturation
Adjust the color saturation of the image.
Item Description
Off Does not adjust the ground color.
Manual Select [1] to [5] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust the background density manually.
NOTE
This feature is used with full color.
Item Description
[-1] to [-3] (Grayish) Results in paler color.
[1] to [3] (Vivid) Results in more vivid color.
Copy
Send
Scan to
USB
Copy
OriginalGrayish Vivid
Results in paler color. Results in more vivid color.
6-22
Using Various Functions > Functions
Skip Blank Page
When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank pages and prints only pages that are
not blank.
When set to [High], the level at which blank paper is recognized is higher.
The machine detects blank pages, saving unnecessary printing without the need to check for blank pages in the
document.
Select [On], [Level], and then [Low], [Middle] or [High].
Scan Resolution
Select fineness of scanning resolution.
(Value: [200 × 100dpi Norm] / [200 × 200dpi Fine] / [200 × 400dpi S.Fin] / [300 × 300dpi] / [400 × 400dpi U.Fin] /
[600 × 600dpi])
NOTE
The originals with punched holes or originals printed on a colored substrate may not be recognized as blank pages.
NOTE
The larger the number, the better the image resolution. However, better resolution also means larger file sizes and
longer send times.
Copy
Send
Scan to
USB
Send
Scan to
USB
6-23
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sending Size
Select size of image to be sent.
Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom
Original Size, Sending Size and Zoom are related to each other. For details, see the table below.
Item Description
Same as OrigSize Send an image the same size as the original.
A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement,
Executive, Oficio II, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9,
Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2
Select from standard sizes.
Original size and sending size are the same different
Original Size (page 6-15) Specify as necessary. Specify as necessary.
Sending Size Select [Same as Original Size]. Select the desired size.
Zoom (page 6-11) Select [100%] (or [Auto]). Select [Auto].
NOTE
When you specify the sending size that is different from the original size, and select the zoom of [100%], you can send
the image as the actual size (No Zoom).
Send
6-24
Using Various Functions > Functions
File Format
Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be adjusted.
Select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS], [OpenXPS], and [High Comp. PDF].
When the color mode in scanning has been selected for Grayscale or Full Color, set the image quality.
If you selected [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], you can specify encryption or PDF/A settings.
Item Value Description
PDF ―Select the [OK] key to save or send a PDF file. The image quality and
PDF/A settings will be the default settings.
For the default settings, refer to the following:
Function Defaults (page 8-28)
Image Quality 1 Low(High Comp) to
5 High(Low Comp)
Select [Detail] to display the [Image Quality] screen.
Select the image quality and select the [OK] key.
Encryption Off, On Set the PDF encryption and then select the [OK] key.
If [On] is selected, refer to the following:
PDF Encryption Functions (page 6-26)
PDF/A Off, PDF/A-1a, PDF/A-1b Select PDF/A-1 format type and select the [OK] key.
TIFF ―Select the [OK] key to save or send a TIFF file. The Image Quality
settings will be the default values.
For the default settings, refer to the following:
Function Defaults (page 8-28)
Image Quality 1 Low(High Comp) to
5 High(Low Comp)
Select [Detail] to display the [Image Quality] screen.
Select the image quality and select the [OK] key.
XPS ―Select the [OK] key to save or send a XPS file. The Image Quality
settings will be the default values.
For the default settings, refer to the following:
Function Defaults (page 8-28)
Image Quality 1 Low(High Comp) to
5 High(Low Comp)
Select [Detail] to display the [Image Quality] screen.
Select the image quality and select the [OK] key.
OpenXPS ―Select the [OK] key to save or send a OpenXPS file. The Image Quality
settings will be the default values.
For the default settings, refer to the following:
Function Defaults (page 8-28)
Image Quality 1 Low(High Comp) to
5 High(Low Comp)
Select [Detail] to display the [Image Quality] screen.
Select the image quality and select the [OK] key.
Send
Scan to
USB
6-25
Using Various Functions > Functions
JPEG ―Select the [OK] key to save or send a JPEG file. The Image Quality
settings will be the default values.
For the default settings, refer to the following:
Function Defaults (page 8-28)
Image Quality 1 Low(High Comp) to
5 High(Low Comp)
Select [Detail] to display the [Image Quality] screen.
Select the image quality and select the [OK] key.
High Comp. PDF ―Select the [OK] key to save or send a High Comp. PDF file. The image
quality and PDF/A settings will be the default settings.
For the default settings, refer to the following:
Function Defaults (page 8-28)
Image Quality Comp. Priority, Standard,
Quality Priority
Select [Detail] to display the [Image Quality] screen.
Select the image quality and select the [OK] key.
Encryption Off, On Set the PDF encryption and then select the [OK] key.
If [On] is selected, refer to to the following:
PDF Encryption Functions (page 6-26)
PDF/A Off, PDF/A-1a, PDF/A-1b Select PDF/A-1 format type and select the [OK] key.
NOTE
If encryption is enabled, PDF/A settings cannot be specified.
Item Value Description
6-26
Using Various Functions > Functions
PDF Encryption Functions
If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying, printing, and
editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.
Select [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], and select [On] of [Encryption] in [Detail].
Items that can be set vary depending on the setting selected in [Compatibility].
Acrobat3.0&Later
Item Value Description
Password Open Document Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.
Select [On] and select the [OK] key.
Enter a password (up to 256 characters) and then select the [OK] key.
Enter the password again for confirmation, and select the [OK] key.
Edit/Print Doc. Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.
Select [On] and select the [OK] key.
Enter a password (up to 256 characters) and then select the [OK] key.
Enter the password again for confirmation, and select the [OK] key.
Printing
Allowed
Not Allowed,
Allowed
Restricts printing of the PDF file. Then select the [OK] key.
Changes
Allowed
Not Allowed,
Commenting,
Page Layout,
Any Changes
Restricts editing of the PDF file. Select from the following restrictions
then select the [OK] key.
Not Allowed: Disables the change to the PDF file.
Commenting: Can only add commenting.
Page Layout: Can change the page layout except extracting the
pages of the PDF file.
Any Changes: Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages
of the PDF file.
Copying
Contents
Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.
Then select the [OK] key.
6-27
Using Various Functions > Functions
Acrobat5.0&Later
Item Value Description
Password Open Document Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.
Select [On] and select the [OK] key.
Enter a password (up to 256 characters) and then select the [OK] key.
Enter the password again for confirmation, and select the [OK] key.
Edit/Print Doc. Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.
Select [On] and select the [OK] key.
Enter a password (up to 256 characters) and then select the [OK] key.
Enter the password again for confirmation, and select the [OK] key.
Printing
Allowed
Not Allowed,
Allowed (Low
Res.), Allowed
Restricts printing of the PDF file. Select from the following restrictions
then select the [OK] key.
Not Allowed: Disables the printing of PDF file.
Allowed (Low Res.): Can print the PDF file only in low resolution.
Allowed: Can print the PDF file in original resolution.
Changes
Allowed
Not Allowed,
Ins./Del./Rotat,
Commenting,
Any Changes
Specifically limit the operation. Select from the following restrictions
then select the [OK] key.
Not Allowed: Disables the change to the PDF file.
Ins./Del./Rotat: Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the
PDF file.
Commenting: Can only add commenting.
Any Changes: Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages
of the PDF file.
Copying
Contents
Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file. Then select
the [OK] key.
6-28
Using Various Functions > Functions
Subject/Body
Adds subject and body when sending a document.
Select [Subject] / [Body] to enter the E-mail subject/body.
FTP Encrypted TX
Encrypts images when sending via FTP.
Encryption secures the document transmission.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
File Separation
Creates several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and sends the files.
(Value: [Off] / [Each Page])
Select [Each Page] to set File Separation.
NOTE
The subject can include up to 60 characters, and the body can include up to 500 characters.
NOTE
Click [Security Settings], and then [Network Security] in the Command Center RX. Be sure that "SSL" of Secure
Settings is "On" and one or more effective encryption are selected in Client side settings.
Command Center RX User Guide
NOTE
A three-digit serial number such as "abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf..." is attached to the end of the file name.
Send
Send
Send
Scan to
USB
6-29
Using Various Functions > Functions
Storing Size
Select size of image to be stored.
Relationship between Original Size, Storing Size, and Zoom
Original Size, Storing Size and Zoom are related to each other. For details, see the table below.
Encrypted PDF
Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data.
Enter the Password, and select [OK].
Item Description
Same as OrigSize Store an image the same size as the original.
A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement,
Executive, Oficio II, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9,
Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2
Select from standard sizes.
Original Size and the size you wish to
store as are the same different
Original Size (page 6-15) Specify as necessary. Specify as necessary.
Storing Size Select [Same as Original Size]. Select the desired size.
Zoom (page 6-11) Select [100%] (or [Auto]). Select [Auto].
NOTE
When you select Storing Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you can store the image
as the actual size (No Zoom).
NOTE
For details on entering the password, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (page 11-8)
Scan to
USB
Print from
USB
6-30
Using Various Functions > Functions
JPEG/TIFF Print
Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files.
(Value: [Paper Size] / [Image Resolution] / [Print Resolution])
XPS Fit to Page
Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Item Description
Paper Size Fits the image size to the selected paper size.
Image Resolution Prints at resolution of the actual image.
Print Resolution Fits the image size to the print resolution.
Print from
USB
Print from
USB
7-1
7 Status/Job Cancel
This chapter explains the following topics:
Checking Job Status .......................................................................................................................................... 7-2
Details of the Status Screens ................................................................................................................... 7-4
Checking Job History ......................................................................................................................................... 7-8
Sending the Log History ........................................................................................................................ 7-12
Job Operation .................................................................................................................................................. 7-13
Pause and Resumption of Jobs ............................................................................................................. 7-13
Canceling of Jobs .................................................................................................................................. 7-13
Device/Communication .................................................................................................................................... 7-14
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) ......................................................... 7-15
7-2
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Checking Job Status
Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.
Available Status Screens
The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the message display in four different screens -
Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, Storing Jobs, and Scheduled Jobs.
The following job statuses are available.
Displaying Status Screens
1Display the screen.
[Status/Job Cancel] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Print Job Status], [Send Job Status],
[Store Job Status] or [Scheduled Job] > [OK] key
Status Display Job status to be displayed
Print Job Status • Copy
• Printer
• FAX reception
• E-mail reception
• Printing from Document Box
• Printing data from removable memory
• Job Report/List
Send Job Status • FAX transmission
• E-mail
• Folder transmission
• Application
• Multiple destination
Store Job Status • Scan
•FAX
• Printer
Scheduled Job • Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission
7-3
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
2Select the job you want to check.
1Select the job you want to check, and [Menu].
2[▲] [▼] key > [Detail] > [OK] key
Jobs Detail Status is displayed.
3Check the status.
Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen.
NOTE
• If a FAX job is selected in [Send Job Status] then [PriorityOverride] is displayed.
Select [PriorityOverride] and select the [OK] key to suspend the current job and gives
the selected job top priority.
•For [Scheduled Job], [Start Now] is displayed. Select [Start Now] and select the [OK]
key to send the selected job immediately.
Print Job Status (page 7-4)
Send Job Status (page 7-5)
Store Job Status (page 7-6)
Scheduled Job Status (page 7-7)
7-4
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Details of the Status Screens
Print Job Status
NOTE
You can show the job statuses of all users, or only the statuses of your own jobs.
Disp. Status/Log (page 8-31)
This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide
Item Description
Status Status of job
[Processing]:The status before starting to print.
[Pause]: Pausing print job or error
[Canceling]: Canceling the job
[-----]: The job is finished.
Accepted Time Accepted Time of job
Job Name When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, select [Detail] to see the
complete job name. Select the [OK] key to return to the previous screen.
Job Type [Copy]: Copy job
[FAX]: FAX reception
[Box]: Job from Document Box
[Printer]: Printer job
[Report]: Report/List
[E-mail]: E-mail reception
[USB]: Data from removable memory
User Name User Name for the executed job
If user login administration is disabled, [----] appears.
Page and Copy • Number of pages printed
• Number of copies printed / Total number of copies to be printed
Original Pages Number of original pages
Color/B & W Color mode
[Color/B & W]
[Full Color]
[Black & White]
[Mixed]
Sender Info. The sender information is displayed.
When receiving a FAX
If the name of the sender is provided when receiving a FAX, the name is displayed. If only the
number of the sender is provided, the number is displayed.
If there is no information about the sender or if a FAX is not received, [----] appears.
For E-mails
The E-mail address is displayed.
In other cases, [----] is displayed.
NOTE
When the sender information is displayed in a short form, select [Detail] to see the complete
sender Information. Select the [OK] key to return to the previous screen.
7-5
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Send Job Status
Item Description
Status Status of job
[Processing]:The status before starting sending such as during scanning originals
[Pause]: Pausing the job
[Canceling]: Canceling the job
Accepted Time Accepted Time of job
Job Name When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, select [Detail] to see the
complete job name. Select the [OK] key to return to the previous screen.
Job Type [FAX]: Sending Job FAX
[E-mail]: Sending Job E-mail
[Folder]: Sending Job Folder (SMB/FTP)
[Application]:Sending Job Application
[Multi]: Multi Sending
User Name User Name for the executed job
If user login administration is disabled, [----] appears.
Original Pages Number of original pages
Color/B & W Color mode
[Color/B & W]
[Full Color]
[Black & White]
[Grayscale]
[Mixed]
Destination The destination is displayed.
If there is one destination:
Destination (Either destination name, FAX number, E-mail address, or server name)
NOTE
When the destination is displayed in a short form, select [Detail] to see the complete
destination. Select the [OK] key to return to the previous screen.
If there are multiple destinations:
[Broadcast] is displayed.
When [List] is selected, all destinations are displayed.
Select [Exit] to return to the original screen.
NOTE
When the destination in a short form, select the destination and then select the [OK] key to see
the complete destination. Select the [OK] key to return to the previous screen.
7-6
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Store Job Status
Item Description
Status Status of job
[Processing]:The status before starting sending such as during scanning originals
[Canceling]: Canceling the job
Accepted Time Accepted Time of job
Job Name When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, select [Detail] to see the
complete job name. Select the [OK] key to return to the previous screen.
Job Type [FAX]: Storing Job FAX
[SCAN]: Storing Job Scan
[Printer]: Storing Job Printer
User Name User Name for the executed job
If user login administration is disabled, [----] appears.
Original Pages Number of original pages
Color/B & W Color mode
[Color/B & W]
[Full Color]
[Black & White]
[Grayscale]
[Mixed]
Sender Info. The sender information is displayed.
When receiving a FAX
If the name of the sender is provided when receiving a FAX, the name is displayed. If only the
number of the sender is provided, the number is displayed.
If there is no information about the sender or if a FAX is not received, [----] appears.
In other cases, [----] is displayed.
NOTE
When the sender Information is displayed in a short form, select [Detail] to see the complete
sender Information. Select the [OK] key to return to the previous screen.
7-7
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Scheduled Job Status
Item Description
Status Status of job
[Waiting]: Waiting Sending
Start Time Time to start the scheduled job
Job Name When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, select [Detail] to see the
complete job name. Select the [OK] key to return to the previous screen.
Job Type [FAX] is displayed.
User Name User Name for the executed job
If user login administration is disabled, [----] appears.
Original Pages Number of original pages
Color/B & W Color mode
[Black & White]
Destination The destination is displayed.
Destination (page 7-5)
7-8
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Checking Job History
Available Job History Screens
The job histories are displayed separately in four screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, Storing Jobs, and FAX Jobs.
The following job histories are available.
NOTE
• Job history is also available by Command Center RX or KYOCERA Net Viewer from the computer.
Command Center RX User Guide
KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide
• You can show the job log of all users, or only your own job log.
Disp. Status/Log (page 8-31)
This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide
Screen Job histories to be displayed
Print Job Log • Copy
• Printer
• FAX reception
• E-mail reception
• Printing from Document Box
• Job Report/List
• Printing data from removable memory
• Application
Send Job Log • FAX
• E-mail
• Folder
• Application
• Multiple destination
Store Job Log • Scan
•FAX
• Printer
FAX Job Log FAX Operation Guide
7-9
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Displaying Job History Screen
1Display the screen.
[Status/Job Cancel] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Print Job Log], [Send Job Log], [Store Job Log]
or [FAX Job Log] > [OK] key
2Select the job you want to check.
Select the job you want to check, and [Detail].
A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right of each job.
• : The job has been completed.
• : An error has occurred.
• : The job has been canceled.
3Check the job history.
Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen.
NOTE
For [FAX Job Log], refer to the following:
FAX Operation Guide
NOTE
You can show the job log of all users, or only your own job log.
Disp. Status/Log (page 8-31)
This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide
Print Job Log (page 7-10)
Send Job Log (page 7-11)
Store Job Log (page 7-12)
7-10
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Print Job Log
Item Description
Result Result of job
[OK]: The job has been completed.
[Error]: An error has occurred.
[Cancel]: The job has been canceled.
Accepted Time Accepted Time of job
End Time Completed time of job
Job Name When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, select
[Detail] to see the complete job name. Select the [OK] key to return to the
previous screen.
Job Type [Copy]: Copy job
[FAX]: FAX reception
[Box]: Job from Document Box
[Printer]: Printer job
[Report]: Report/List
[E-mail]: E-mail reception
[USB]: Data from removable memory
User Name User Name for the executed job
If user login administration is disabled, [----] appears.
Page and Copy • Number of pages printed
• Number of copies printed / Total number of copies to be printed
Original Pages Number of original pages
Color/B & W Color mode
[Color/B & W]
[Full color]
[Black & White]
[Mixed]
Sender Info. The sender information is displayed.
Sender Info. (page 7-4)
7-11
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Send Job Log
Item Description
Result Result of job
[OK]: The job has been completed.
[Error]: An error has occurred.
[Cancel]: The job has been canceled.
Accepted Time Accepted Time of job
End Time Completed time of job
Job Name When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, select
[Detail] to see the complete job name. select the [OK] key to return to the
previous screen.
Job Type [E-mail]: Sending Job E-mail
[Folder]: Sending Job Folder (SMB/FTP)
[FAX]: Sending Job FAX
[Application]: Sending Job Application
[Multi]: Multi Sending
User Name User Name for the executed job
If user login administration is disabled, [----] appears.
Original Pages Number of original pages
Color/B & W Color mode
[Color/B & W]
[Full Color]
[Black & White]
[Grayscale]
[Mixed]
Destination The destination is displayed.
Destination (page 7-5)
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, log in by referring to the
following:
Login (page 2-15)
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
7-12
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Store Job Log
Sending the Log History
You can send the log history by E-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically
whenever a set number of jobs is reached.
Send History (page 8-6)
Item Description
Result Result of job
[OK]: The job has been completed.
[Error]: An error has occurred.
[Cancel]: The job has been canceled.
Accepted Time Accepted Time of job
End Time Completed time of job
Job Name When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, select
[Detail] to see the complete job name. Select the [OK] key to return to the
previous screen.
Job Type [FAX]: Storing Job FAX
[SCAN]: Storing Job Scan
[Printer]: Storing Job Printer
User Name User Name for the executed job
If user login administration is disabled, [----] appears.
Original Pages Number of original pages
Color/B & W Color mode
[Color/B & W]
[Full Color]
[Black & White]
[Grayscale]
[Mixed]
Sender Info. The sender information is displayed.
Sender Info. (page 7-6)
7-13
Status/Job Cancel > Job Operation
Job Operation
Pause and Resumption of Jobs
Pause/resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.
1Display the screen.
Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2Select [Pause].
Printing is paused.
When resuming the printing of jobs that have been paused, select [Resume].
Canceling of Jobs
A job in printing/waiting status can be canceled.
1Display the screen.
[Status/Job Cancel] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Print Job Status], [Send Job Status],
[Store Job Status] or [Scheduled Job] > [OK] key
2Cancel a job.
Print Job Status
1Select the job to be canceled, and [Menu].
2[▲] [▼] key > [Cancel Job] > [OK] key > [Yes]
Send Job Status, Store Job Status or Scheduled Job Status
1Select the job to be canceled, and [Cancel].
2Select [Yes].
NOTE
If the [Back] key or other function key, such as the [Copy] key, is selected during Pause,
"Resume paused jobs. Are you sure?" appears. If [Yes] is selected and then the [OK] key is
selected, the job is resumed and the following screen appears. If [No] is selected and then
the [OK] key is selected, the following screen appears while the job is paused.
NOTE
When FAX reception job is selected, [Cannot cancel FAX reception jobs.] is displayed
and the job cannot be canceled.
NOTE
A job can be canceled by selecting [Menu], selecting [Cancel Job] and then selecting
the [OK] key.
7-14
Status/Job Cancel > Device/Communication
Device/Communication
Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status.
1Display the screen.
1Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2Select the items you want to check. Then, select the [OK] key to show the status of the
selected device.
2Check the status.
The items you can check are described below.
"Scanner"
Statuses such as the original scanning status and standby are displayed.
"Printer"
Statuses such as waiting and printing are displayed.
"FAX"
• The information such as sending/receiving and dialing is displayed.
•Select [Line Off] to cancel a fax in sending/receiving.
USB Memory
• The usage, capacity and free space of the external media connected to this machine are
displayed.
•Select [Remove] to safely remove the external media.
"USB Keyboard"
The status of the optional USB Keyboard is displayed.
"Network"
The network connection status appears.
"Wi-Fi"
The Wi-Fi connection status and network name (SSID) of the machine appear.
This function is displayed when the wireless network function is available on the machine.
FAX Operation Guide
7-15
Status/Job Cancel > Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies)
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner
and Paper (Paper/Supplies)
Check the remaining amount of toner, and paper on the message display.
1Display the screen.
Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2Check the status.
[▲] [▼] key > [Toner Status] or [Paper Status] > [OK] key
The items you can check are described below.
"Toner Status"
The amount of toner remaining is shown in levels.
"Paper Status"
The status of the source is displayed. Select the [►] key to view the next source. Select the
[◄] key to return to the previous screen.
8-1
8
Setup and Registration
(System Menu)
This chapter explains the following topics:
System Menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
Operation Method .................................................................................................................................... 8-2
System Menu Settings ............................................................................................................................. 8-3
Report ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-5
System/Network ....................................................................................................................................... 8-7
User/Job Account .................................................................................................................................. 8-18
User Property ......................................................................................................................................... 8-18
Common Settings .................................................................................................................................. 8-19
Copy ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-32
Printer .................................................................................................................................................... 8-33
Send ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-35
FAX ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-36
Document Box ....................................................................................................................................... 8-36
Edit Destination ...................................................................................................................................... 8-37
Adjust/Maint. .......................................................................................................................................... 8-38
8-2
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
System Menu
Configure settings related to overall machine operation.
Operation Method
Select the [System Menu/Counter] key to show the settings on the message display. Then, select from the settings
displayed.
Refer to System Menu Settings on the following page and configure as needed.
Operation Method (page 2-13)
NOTE
• In order to change settings that require administer privileges, you must log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
• If function default settings have been changed, the [Reset] key can be selected in each function screen to
immediately change the settings.
1
3
4
2
1 Displays the System Menu items.
2 Selects the item displayed or changes
the numeric value.
3 Confirms the selected setting.
4 Cancels the current menu setting to
return to the menu one level higher.
8-3
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
System Menu Settings
This section explains the functions that can be configured in System Menu. To configure the settings, select the item in
System Menu and select the setting item. For details on each function, see the table below.
Item Description Reference Page
Report Print Print reports to check the machine settings, status, and history. Settings
for printing reports can also be configured.
page 8-5
Admin Rpt Set. Refer to the FAX
Operation Guide.
Result Rpt Set. page 8-6
Job Log History page 8-6
Counter This counts the number of pages printed or scanned. page 2-43
Network Setting Configures network settings. page 8-7
Primary Network Specify the network to be used for the send function, the network
authentication and connecting to external address book.
page 8-16
I/F Block Set. This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with
external devices such as USB hosts.
page 8-17
Security Level The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service
personnel for maintenance work. There is no need for customers to use
this menu.
—
Restart Restart the machine without turning the power switch off. Use this to deal
with any unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the computer
restart.)
page 8-17
Op Functions You can use the optional applications installed on this machine. page 8-17
User/Job Account Configures settings related to machine management.
User Login:
Overview of User Login Administration (page 9-2)
Job Accounting:
Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-22)
—
User Property Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of
that information.
page 8-18
Language Select the language displayed on the message display. page 8-19
Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). page 8-19
Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations. page 8-19
Display Bright. Set the brightness of the message display. page 8-19
Orig./Paper Set. Configure settings for originals. page 8-20
Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. page 8-24
Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions. page 8-24
Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred. page 8-25
Date Setting Configure settings related to the date and time. page 8-25
Timer Setting Configure settings related to the time. page 8-26
Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed
or the [Reset] key is selected.
Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending. Setting
the frequently-used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier.
page 8-28
8-4
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Login Operation Select the screen to enter the login user name and password when
logging in.
page 8-28
RAM Disk Mode A RAM disk can be created and its size can be set. page 8-30
Format SD Card Format an SD/SDHC memory card. page 8-30
Optional Memory When optional memory is installed, select the memory allocation scheme
based on the application in which you are using the equipment.
page 8-30
Disp. Status/Log Set the display method of the Status/Log. page 8-31
USB KeyboardType Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use. page 8-31
Low Toner Alert Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when to
order a toner when the toner is running low.
page 8-31
ColorToner Empty Select whether printing is prohibited or the Print in Black and White
setting is used for printing once the color toner runs out.
page 8-31
Show PowerOffMsg Set the mode whether display a confirmation message in power supply
off.
page 8-31
EnergySaver Set. Select the method of recovery from energy saver. page 8-32
Copy Configures settings for copying functions. page 8-32
Printer Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application
software screen. However, the following settings are available for
configuring the defaults to customize the machine.
page 8-33
Send Configures settings for sending functions. page 8-35
FAX Configures settings for fax functions.
FAX Operation Guide
—
Document Box Configures settings related to the Job Box, Sub Address Box and Polling
Box. For details on Sub Address Box and Polling Box, see the FAX
Operation Guide.
page 8-36
Edit Destination Configures Address Book and One Touch Key settings.
Address Book:
Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-20)
One Touch Key:
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-
27)
page 8-37
Adjust/Maint. Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance. page 8-38
Item Description Reference Page
8-5
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Report
Print reports to check the machine settings, status, and history. Settings for printing reports can also be configured.
Report Print
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report Print] > [OK] key
Item Description
Menu Map Prints Menu Map to check the settings of the machine.
Status Page Prints the status page, allowing you to check the information including current settings, memory
capacity, and optional equipment installed.
Font List Prints the font list, allowing you to check the font samples installed in the machine.
Menu Map
Status Page
8-6
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Admin Rpt Set.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Admin Rpt Set.] > [OK] key
Configure settings for Outgoing FAX report and Incoming FAX report.
FAX Operation Guide
Result Rpt Set.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Result Rpt Set.] > [OK] key
Job Log History
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Job Log History] > [OK] key
Item Description
Send Result Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete.
E-mail/Folder Automatically print a report of transmission result when E-mail or SMB/FTP transmission is
complete.
Value: Off, On, Error Only
FAX FAX Operation Guide
CancelBeforeSend*1
*1 When "E-mail/Folder" and "FAX" are set to [Off], this function will not be displayed.
Print a send result report if the job is canceled before being sent.
Value: Off, On
Dest. Info.*1 Select the Recipient Format for the send result report.
Value: Dest. or Name, Dest. and Name
FAX RX Result FAX Operation Guide
JobFinish Notice Attaches sent images to job finish notices.
Value: Do Not Attach Image, Attach SendImage
Item Description
Auto Sending
This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations whenever a set
number of jobs has been logged.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, specify the number of job histories. The setting range is 1 to 16.
Send History You can also send the log history to the specified destinations manually.
Destination Set the destination to which log histories are sent. Only E-mail address can be set.
Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by E-mail.
Value: Up to 60 characters
Personal Info. Select whether to include personal information in the job log.
Value: Include, Exclude
8-7
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
System/Network
Configures machine system settings.
Network Setting
[
System Menu/Counter
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
System/Network
] > [
OK
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
Network Setting
] > [
OK
] key
Configures network settings.
Host Name
Wi-Fi Direct Set
Set Wi-Fi Direct.
Item Description
Host Name
Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Command Center RX.
Changing Device Information (page 2-49)
NOTE
This function is displayed when the wireless network function is available on the machine.
Item Description
Wi-Fi Direct Select whether to use Wi-Fi Direct.
Value: Off, On
Device Name Specify the device name.
NOTE
• Up to 32 characters can be entered.
• This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].
IP Address Check the IP address of the machine.
TCP/IP Settings (page 8-10)
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].
Auto Disconnect Automatically disconnect devices connected through Wi-Fi Direct.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].
Disconnect Timer If you select [ON] to Auto Disconnect, set the waiting time for automatic disconnection.
Value: Day (00 to 99), Hour (00 to 23), Minute (00 to 59)
8-8
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Wi-Fi Settings
Set Wi-Fi.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the wireless network function is available on the machine.
Item Description
Wi-Fi Select whether to use Wi-Fi.
Value:
Off, On
Setup -
ConnectionStatus Check the wireless LAN status.
Quick Setup If the machine will connect to an access point that supports the automatic wireless network
setup, connection settings can be configured by Quick Setup.
NOTE
If you are connecting to an access point that has WEP enabled, select [WEP Key Index] and
select the WEP key index.
AvailableNetwork Displays access points to which the machine can connect.
NOTE
• When [Reload] is selected, the list is reloaded.
• If the access point's security setting uses WEP, select [Menu] and set [WEP Key Index].
WEP Key Index Select the key index of the access point.
Value:
0 to 3
Push Button If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings can be configured using
the push button. This setting executes push button, and the connection is started by pressing
the push button on the access point.
NOTE
The push button method supports only the WPS.
PIN (Device) Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into the access point. The
PIN code of the machine is automatically generated.
8-9
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Custom Setup The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed.
Network Name (SSID) Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the machine connects.
NOTE
Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Netwk Authentic. Select network authentication type.
Value: Open, WPA2/WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, WPA2/WPA-EAP, WPA2-EAP
Encryption Select encryption method. The setting values vary depending on the Network Authentication
setting.
Item Description
Network
Authentication
Encryption
Open Disable ―
WEP WEP Key: Up to 26 characters
WEP Key Index: 0 to 3
WPA2/WPA-PSK Data Encryption: AES, Auto
Preshared Key: Up to 64 characters
WPA2-PSK Data Encryption: AES , Auto
Preshared Key: Up to 64 characters
WPA2/WPA-EAP Data Encryption: AES, Auto
WPA2-EAP Data Encryption: AES, Auto
8-10
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
TCP/IP Settings -
TCP/IP Select whether to use TCP/IP Protocol.
Value: Off, On
IPv4 Setting Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/IP] is set to
[On].
DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv4) server.
Value: Off, On
Auto-IP Select whether to use Auto-IP.
Value: Off, On
IP Address Set the IP address.
Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this item is displayed only and cannot be entered.
Subnet Mask Set the IP subnet mask.
Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this item is displayed only and cannot be entered.
Default Gateway Set the IP gateway address.
Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this item is displayed only and cannot be entered.
IMPORTANT
• When setting the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].
• After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
8-11
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Wired Netwk. Set
Configure wired network settings.
Item Description
IPv6 Setting Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/IP] is [On].
IPv6 Setting Select whether to use IPv6.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [Link Local] after restarting the network.
Manual Settings Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP (IPv6).
Value
IP Address: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-digit
hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
Prefix Length: 0 to 128
Default Gateway: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-digit
hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6 Setting] is set to [On].
To enter "Default Gateway", set [RA (Stateless)] to [Off].
RA(Stateless) Select whether to use RA (Stateless).
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6 Setting] is set to [On].
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address 1 (to 5)] after restarting the network.
DHCPv6 Settings Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv6) server.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6 Setting] is set to [On].
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address] after restarting the network.
Restart Network Restarts the network.
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
Item Description
TCP/IP Settings For details on setting value.
TCP/IP Settings (page 8-10)
LAN Interface Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used.
Value: Auto, 10BASE-Half, 10BASE-Full, 100BASE-Half, 100BASE-Full, 1000BASE-T
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
8-12
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Bonjour
IPSec
ProtocolSettings
Configure protocol settings.
Item Description
Protocol Setting Select whether to use Bonjour.
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct*1
*1 Displayed only when the wireless network function is available on the machine.
Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
Wi-Fi*1
Wired Network
Item Description
IPSec Make this setting when you use IPSec.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [Bonjour] is set to [ON], set [Rule Setting].
Item Description
NetBEUI Selects whether to receive documents using NetBEUI.*1
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This function is displayed when [NetBEUI] is set to [On].
Wi-Fi*2
Wired Network
SNMPv3 Select whether to communicate using SNMPv3.*1
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This function is displayed when [SNMPv3] is set to [On].
Wi-Fi*2
Wired Network
FTP (Server) Select whether to receive documents using FTP.*1
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This function is displayed when [FTP (Server)] is set to [On].
Wi-Fi*2
Wired Network
FTP (Client) Select whether to send documents using FTP. When selecting [On], set the FTP Port Number.
The default port number is 21.
Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1 to 65535)
8-13
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
SMB Select whether to send documents using SMB. When selecting [On], set the SMB default Port
Number. The default port number is 445.
Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1 to 65535)
SNMP Select whether to communicate using SNMP.*1
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This function is displayed when [SNMP] is set to [On].
Wi-Fi*2
Wired Network
SMTP Select whether to send E-mail using SMTP.
Value: Off, On
POP3 Select whether to receive E-mail using POP3.
Value: Off, On
RAW Port Select whether to receive documents using Raw Port.*1
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This function is displayed when [RAW Port] is set to [On].
Wi-Fi*2
Wired Network
LPD Selects whether to receive documents using LPD.*1
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This function is displayed when [LPD] is set to [On].
Wi-Fi*2
Wired Network
IPP Selects whether to receive documents using IPP. To use the IPP protocol, select [Not Secure
(IPP&IPPS)] on IPP Security under Security Settings from the Command Center RX. The
default port number is 631.*1
Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1 to 32767)
Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPP] is set to [On].
Wi-Fi*2
Wired Network
Item Description
8-14
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
IPP Over SSL Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL.*1, *3
Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1 to 32767)
NOTE
When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. the default certificate is the self-
certificate of the machine.
Command Center RX User Guide
Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPP Over SSL] is set to [On].
Wi-Fi*2
Wired Network
HTTP Select whether to communicate using HTTP.*1
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This function is displayed when [HTTP] is set to [On].
Wi-Fi*2
Wired Network
HTTPS Select whether to communicate using HTTPS.*1, *3
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This function is displayed when [HTTPS] is set to [On].
Wi-Fi*2
Wired Network
LDAP Select whether to use LDAP.
Value: Off, On
ThinPrint Select whether to use ThinPrint. To use the Thin Print protocol, set the protocol to [On]. The
default port number is 4000.*1, *3
Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1 to 32767)
NOTE
This function is displayed only when the optional ThinPrint Option is activated.
Thin Print over SSL To use the Thin Print over SSL protocol, set [Thin Print Over SSL] to [On].*1, *3
Value: Off, On
NOTE
• This function is displayed when [ThinPrint] is set to [On].
• When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default certificate is the self-
certificate of the machine.
Command Center RX User Guide
Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This function is displayed when [ThinPrint] is set to [On].
Wi-Fi*2
Wired Network
Item Description
8-15
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
WSD-SCAN Select whether to use WSD Scan.*1
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This function is displayed when [WSD-SCAN] is set to [On].
Wi-Fi*2
Wired Network
WSD-PRINT Set whether to use our proprietary web services. WIA driver, TWAIN driver and Network FAX
driver use this Enhanced WSD web service.*1
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This function is displayed when [WSD-PRINT] is set to [On].
Wi-Fi*2
Wired Network
Enhanced WSD Set whether to use our proprietary web services.*1
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA, TWAIN, and Network FAX driver.
Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Enhanced WSD] is set to [On].
Wi-Fi*2
Wired Network
EnhancedWSD(SSL) Set whether to use our proprietary web services over SSL.*1, *3
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA, TWAIN and Network FAX drivers.
Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This function is displayed when [EnhancedWSD(SSL)] is set to [On].
Wi-Fi*2
Wired Network
eSCL Selects whether to receive scanned documents using eSCL.*1
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This function is displayed when [eSCL] is set to [On].
Wi-Fi*2
Wired Network
Item Description
8-16
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Secure Settings
Ping
Restart Network
Primary Network
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Primary Network] >
[OK]key
eSCL over SSL Selects whether to receive scanned documents using eSCL over SSL.*1, *3
Value: Off, On
Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This function is displayed when [eSCL over SSL] is set to [On].
Wi-Fi*2
Wired Network
*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.
*2 Displayed only when the wireless network function is available on the machine.
*3 Set "SSL" to [On] in Secure Settings.
Secure Settings (page 8-16)
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
Item Description
SSL Select whether or not to use SSL.
Value: Off, On
Item Description
Ping Checks if communication with the destination by entering the host name or IP address of the
destination is possible.
Item Description
Restart Network Restarts the network.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the wireless network function is available on the machine.
Item Description
Primary Network Specify the network to be used for the send function, the network authentication and
connecting to external address book.
Value: Wi-Fi, Wired Network
Item Description
8-17
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
I/F Block Set.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [I/F Block Set.] > [OK] key
This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts.
Security Level
[
System Menu/Counter
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
System/Network
] > [
OK
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
Security Level
] > [
OK
] key
Restart
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Restart] > [OK] key
Op Functions
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Op Functions] > [OK] key
Item Description
USB Host This locks and protects the USB host.
Value: Unblock, Block
USB Device This locks and protects the USB interface connector (USB Device).
Value: Unblock, Block
USB Storage This locks and protects the USB memory slot.
Value: Unblock, Block
NOTE
This function is available when USB Host is set to [Unblock].
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
Item Description
Security Level Specify the security level.
Value
Low: This mode is used during maintenance. Do not use normally.
High: This is the security setting we recommend. Use this setting normally.
Very High: In addition to [High] setting, this setting disables the machine settings to be
changed from external command.
Item Description
Restart Restart the machine without turning the power switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable
operation by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.)
Item Description
Op Functions You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.
Optional Applications (page 11-6)
8-18
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
User/Job Account
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
Configure settings related to machine management.
Overview of User Login Administration (page 9-2)
Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-22)
Unknown ID Job (page 9-38)
User Property
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User Property] > [OK] key
Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of that information.
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
8-19
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Common Settings
Configures overall machine operation.
Language
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Language] > [OK] key
Default Screen
[
System Menu/Counter
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
Common Settings
] > [
OK
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
Default Screen
] > [
OK
] key
Sound
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Sound] > [OK] key
Display Bright. (Display Brightness)
[
System Menu/Counter
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
Common Settings
] > [
OK
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
Display Bright.
] > [
OK
] key
Item Description
Language Select the language displayed on the message display.
Item Description
Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen).
Value: Status, Copy, Send, FAX, Document Box
Item Description
Buzzer Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.
Key Confirmation Emit a sound when the operation panel keys are selected.
Value: Off, On
Job Finish Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed.
Value: Off, On, FAX RX Only
Ready Emit a sound when the warm-up is completed.
Value: Off, On
Warning Emit a sound when errors occur.
Value: Off, On
Keyboard Confirm Emit a sound to confirm keypresses with a sound.
Value: Off, On
FAX Speaker FAX Operation Guide
FAX Monitor FAX Operation Guide
Item Description
Display Bright. Set the brightness of the message display.
Value: Darker -3, Darker -2, Darker -1, Normal 0, Lighter +1, Lighter +2, Lighter +3
8-20
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Orig./Paper Set.
[
System Menu/Counter
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
Common Settings
] > [
OK
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
Orig./Paper Set.
] > [
OK
] key
Configure settings for originals.
Item Description
Custom Orig. Size Set up frequently-used custom original size.
The custom size option is displayed on the screen to select original size.
Value
Metric
X: 50 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 50 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch
X: 1.97 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 1.97 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)
X=Length, Y=Width
Detect Orig.(DP) Select whether to automatically detect originals of the document processor.
Auto Detect Select whether to enable automatic detection of original size.
Value: off, on
System of Units Select metric or inch for the unit of original size detection.
Value: Metric, Inch
LGL/OFII/216x340 As Legal, OficioII and 216 x 340 mm are similar in size, select either one of them for automatic
detection.
Value: Legal, OficioII, 216 x 340 mm
NOTE
When [Auto Detect] is set to [Off], this function will not be displayed.
When [System of Units] is set to [Metric], this function will not be displayed.
Def. Orig. Size Set the default original size.
Value: Off*1, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Statement, Executive, 16K
*1 This function is displayed when [Auto Detect] in [Detect Orig.(DP)] is set to [On].
Horizontal
8-21
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Custom PaperSize Set up frequently-used custom paper size.
One custom paper size is set for each paper supply source. The custom size option is
displayed on the screen to select paper size.
Cassette 1 (2) Size Register the custom paper size to be used in Cassette 1 (2).
Value
Metric
X: 105 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch
X: 4.13 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)
X=Length, Y=Width
MP Tray Size Register the custom paper size to be used in the multipurpose tray.
Value
Metric
X: 70 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch
X: 2.76 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)
X=Length, Y=Width
Cassette 1 (2) Set. Select the paper size and media type for cassettes 1 (2).
Cassette 1 (2) Set. (Cassette 1 (2) Settings) (page 8-23)
MP Tray Set. Select the paper size and media type for the multipurpose tray.
MP Tray Set. (Multipurpose Tray Settings) (page 8-23)
Media Type Set. Select weight for each media type.
For Custom 1 to 8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.
Media Type Setting (page 8-24)
Media for
Auto
Full Color Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper
Selection. If [Plain] is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is
selected. Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the
specific size.
Value: All Media Types, Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,
Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, Coated,
High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Black & White
Vertical
Vertical Horizontal
8-22
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Item Description
Def. PaperSource Select the default paper source from Cassette 1 (2) and multipurpose tray.
Value: Cassette 1 (2), MP Tray
NOTE
[Cassette 2] is displayed when optional paper feeder is installed.
SpecialPaper Act. When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or
the print direction might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the
combination of copying functions. In such a case, select [Adj. PrintDirect] to adjust the print
direction. When paper orientation is not important, select [Speed Priority].
If [Adj. PrintDirect] is selected, load paper according to the steps below.
Example: copying on Letterhead
Value: Adj. PrintDirect, Speed Priority
Paper Setup Msg Set whether to display the confirmation screen for the paper setting when a new paper is set for
each cassette.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
[Cassette 2] is displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.
Cassette 1 to 2
MP Tray
Multipurpose TrayCassetteFinishedPaperOriginal
Multipurpose TrayCassetteFinishedPaperOriginal
8-23
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Cassette 1 (2) Set. (Cassette 1 (2) Settings)
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Orig./Paper Set.] >
[OK]key > [▲] [▼] key > [Cassette 1 (2) Set.] > [OK] key
Select paper size and media type for Cassettes 1 (2).
MP Tray Set. (Multipurpose Tray Settings)
[
System Menu/Counter
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
Common Settings
]
> [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Orig./Paper Set.]
>
[
OK
]key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
MP Tray Set.
] > [
OK
] key
Select paper size and media type for the multipurpose tray.
Item Description
Cassette 1 (2) Size Available options are as follows:
Value: A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive,
Oficio II, 16K, ISO B5, Custom
Cassette 1 (2) Type*1
*1 To change to a media type other than "Plain".
Media Type Setting (page 8-24).
When a paper weight that cannot be loaded in the cassette is set for a media type, that media type does not appear.
Select the media type.
Value: Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Rough, Recycled, Preprinted*2, Bond, Color, Prepunched*2,
Letterhead*2, Thick (106 to 163 g/m2), High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
*2 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead.
SpecialPaper Act. (page 8-22)
Item Description
MP Tray Size Available options are as follows:
Value: A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Statement,
Executive, Oficio II, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,
Youkei 2, Custom*1
*1 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size.
Custom PaperSize (page 8-21)
MP Tray Type*2
*2 To change to a media type other than "Plain".
Media Type Setting (page 8-24)
Select the media type.
Values: Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (60 to 220 g/m2), Labels, Recycled,
Preprinted*3, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched*3, Letterhead*3, Envelope,
Thick(106to220g/m
2), Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
*3 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead.
SpecialPaper Act. (page 8-22)
8-24
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Media Type Setting
The following media type and paper weight combinations are available.
Each media type's default weight is indicated.
For Custom 1 to 8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.
Preset Limit
[
System Menu/Counter
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
Common Settings
] > [
OK
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
Preset Limit
] > [
OK
] key
Measurement
[
System Menu/Counter
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
Common Settings
] > [
OK
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
Measurement
] > [
OK
] key
Paper Weight Weight (g/m2)Paper Weight Weight (g/m2)
Light 52 g/m² to 59 g/m² Heavy 1*1
*1 The processing speed will be slower than normal.
106 g/m² to 135 g/m²
Normal 1 60 g/m² to 74 g/m² Heavy 2*1 136 g/m² to 163 g/m²
Normal 2 75 g/m² to 90 g/m² Heavy 3*1 164 g/m² to 220 g/m²
Normal 3 91 g/m² to 105 g/m² Extra Heavy*1 Transparencies
Media Type Default Media Type Default
Plain Normal 2 Color Normal 2
Rough Normal 3 Prepunched Normal 2
Vellum Heavy 1 Letterhead Normal 2
Labels Heavy 1 Envelope Heavy 2
Recycled Normal 2 Thick Heavy 2
Preprinted Normal 2 High Quality Normal 2
Bond Normal 3 Coated Heavy 1
Cardstock Heavy 3 Custom 1 to 8 Normal 2
Item Description
Duplex Print Permit Duplex printing allowed.
Prohibit Duplex printing not allowed.
Name Change names for Custom 1 to 8. Names should be not more than 16 characters. Selecting
media type at multipurpose tray, the name after change will be displayed.
Character Entry Method (page 11-8)
Item Description
Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time.
Value: 1 to 999 copies.
Item Description
Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.
Value: inch, mm
8-25
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Error Handling
[
System Menu/Counter
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
Common Settings
] > [
OK
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
Error Handling
] > [
OK
] key
Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred.
Date Setting
[
System Menu/Counter
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
Common Settings
] > [
OK
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
Date Setting
] > [
OK
] key
Configure settings related to the date and time.
Item Description
DuplexPaperError
Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type.
Value
1-sided: Printed in 1-sided
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
PaperMismatchErr Select what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type
loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the
cassette or multipurpose tray.
Value
Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
Item Description
Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. When you send an E-mail
using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of
the E-mail message.
Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (01 to 12), Day (01 to 31), Hour (00 to 23),
Minute (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)
Setting Date and Time (page 2-17)
NOTE
If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be
able to use the application.
Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation.
Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day
Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list. If you select
a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for summer time.
Setting Date and Time (page 2-17)
Summer Time
8-26
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Timer Setting
[
System Menu/Counter
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
Common Settings
] > [
OK
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
Timer Setting
] > [
OK
] key
Configure settings related to the time.
Item Description
Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the
default setting. Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
The time allowed to elapse before the panel is reset is set with the following:
PanelReset Timer (page 8-26)
PanelReset Timer
If you select [
On
] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Auto Panel Reset] is set to [On].
Sleep Level (models except for
Europe)
Select the Sleep level.
Set the Energy Saver mode to reduce power consumption even more than
Quick Recovery
mode.
Value: Quick Recovery, Energy Saver
(Detailed settings)
Set whether to use the Energy Saver mode for the following functions individually:
•Network
• Card Reader*1
•FAX
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When the machine enters Energy Saver, the ID card cannot be recognized.
Sleep Rules (models for
Europe)
Select whether to use the Sleep mode for the following functions individually:
•Network
• Card Reader*1
•FAX
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When the machine enters Energy Saver, the ID card cannot be recognized.
Sleep Timer Set amount of time before entering Sleep.
Value
For Europe
1 to 60 minutes (1 minute increments)
Except for Europe
1 to 240 minutes (1 minute increments)
Sleep (page 2-26)
8-27
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Power Off Rule (models for
Europe)
Select whether or not the machine enters Power Off mode for the following function. Select
[On] to set the Power Off mode.
•Network
•FAX
• USB Cable
• USB Host
• RAM Disk
• Remote Diag.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Even when any of the functions is set to [On], if [FAX] is set to [Off], the machine does not
enter Power Off Mode.
Even when [Network] or [USB Cable] is set to [Off], if the machine does not communicate with
the other devices, the machine will enter Power Off Mode.
Power Off Timer (models for
Europe)
Select whether to turn off the power automatically after a period of inactivity.
Value: 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 5 hours, 6 hours, 9 hours, 12 hours, 1 day, 2
days, 3 days, 4 days, 5 days, 6 days, 1 week
Auto Err. Clear If an error occurs during processing, processing stops to wait for the next step to be taken by
the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time
elapses.
Value: Off, On
Err. Clear Timer If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before automatically
clearing errors.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Auto Err. Clear] is set to [On].
Unusable Time Set a time period during which the machine will not print received faxes.
FAX Operation Guide
Ping Timeout Set the time until timeout occurs when [Ping] is executed in "System/Network".
Value: 1 to 30 seconds (in 1 second increments)
*1 Displayed only when the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated.
Item Description
8-28
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Function Defaults
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Function Defaults] >
[OK] key
Item Description
Color
Selection
Copy Set the default copying color mode setting.
Value: Full Color, Black & White
Send/Store Select the default color mode for scanning documents.
Value: Full Color, Grayscale, Black & White
Scan Resolution Select the default scanning resolution.
Value: 200×100dpi Norm., 200×200dpi Fine, 200×400dpi S.Fin, 300×300dpi,
400×400dpi U.Fin, 600×600dpi
FAX Resolution FAX Operation Guide
Orig.Image(Copy) Set the default original document type for copying.
Value: Text+Photo, Photo, Text, Graphic/Map, Printed Document
Orig.Image(Send) Set the default original document type for sending.
Value: Text+Photo, Photo, Text, for OCR, Light Text/Line
NOTE
[for OCR] is only available when "Color Selection" is set to [Black & White].
Zoom
Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the originals set.
Value: 100%, Auto
Collate Set the defaults for Collate.
Value: Off, On
Original Orientation Set the original orientation defaults.
Value: Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left
Backgrnd(Copy) Set the default Backgrnd Density (Copy).
Value: Off, Manual (Darker 5)
Backgrnd(Send) Set the default Backgrnd Density (Send).
Value: Off, Manual (Darker 5)
EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default.
Value: Off, On
Skip Blank(Copy) Set the default Skip Blank(Copy) settings.
Value: Off, On
Skip Blank(Send) Set the default Skip Blank(Send) settings.
Value: Off, On
File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as Date and
Job No. can also be set.
Value
File Name: Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Additional Info: None, Date, Job No., Job No. + Date, Date + Job No.
Subject/Body Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the
scanned originals by E-mail.
Value
Subject: Up to 60 characters can be entered.
Body: Up to 500 characters can be entered.
8-29
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Con.scan-Copy Set the continuous scan (copy) defaults.
Value: Off, On
Con.scan-FAX FAX Operation Guide
Con.scan-Others Set the continuous scan (excludes copy) defaults.
Value: Off, On
File Format Select the default type of the files to be sent.
Value: PDF, TIFF, XPS, JPEG, OpenXPS, High Comp. PDF
File Separation Select the default file separation setting.
Value: Off, Each Page
JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file.
Value: Paper Size, Image Resolution, Print Resolution
XPS FitTo Page Set the default value for the XPS fit to page function.
Value: Off, On
Detail Settings —
2 in 1 Layout Set the default for the 2-in-1 layout of Combine copies.
Value: L to R, T to B, R to L, B to T
4 in 1 Layout Set the default for the 4-in-1 layout of Combine copies.
Value: Right then Down, Down then Right, Left then Down, Down then Left
Border Line Set the default for the border line of Combine copies.
Value: None, Solid Line, Dotted Line, Positioning Mark
Finish. Binding Set the default for the binding orientation of finished two-sided copies.
Value: Left/Right, Top
Image Quality Select the default PDF/TIFF/JPEG/XPS/OpenXPS file quality.
Value: 1 Low(High Comp) to 5 High(Low Comp)
Color TIFF Comp. Select the compression method for sending the color documents in the TIFF format.
Value: TIFF V6, TTN2
PDF/A Select the default PDF/A setting.
Value: Off, PDF/A-1a, PDF/A-1b
High Comp. PDF Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files.
Value: Comp. Priority, Standard, Quality Priority
Blank Lvl (Copy) Select the default Blank Detection Level (Copy) settings.
Value: Low, Middle, High
Blank Lvl (Send) Select the default Blank Detection Level (Send/Store) settings.
Value: Low, Middle, High
Item Description
8-30
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Login Operation
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Login Operation] >
[OK] key
RAM Disk Mode
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [RAM Disk Mode] >
[OK] key
Format SD Card
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Format SD Card] >
[OK] key
Format an SD/SDHC memory card.
A new SD card must be formatted before it can be used in the machine.
Optional Memory
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Optional Memory] >
[OK] key
Item Description
Login Operation Select the screen to enter the login user name and password when logging in.
Value: Use Numeric Key, Select Character
Item Description
RAM Disk Mode A RAM disk can be created and its size can be set.
Creating a RAM disk makes it possible to print from a Job Box.
Value
RAM Disk Mode: Off, On
RAM Disk Size: The setting range varies depending on the amount of memory installed
and the option memory usage setting.
NOTE
This function will be displayed when the optional memory is installed.
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
IMPORTANT
Formatting will destroy any existing data on a storage device including a used SD card.
Item Description
Optional Memory When optional memory is installed, select the memory allocation scheme based on the
application in which you are using the equipment.
Value: Normal, Printer Priority, Copy Priority
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
8-31
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Disp. Status/Log
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Disp. Status/Log] >
[OK] key
Set the display method of the Status/Log.
USB KeyboardType
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [USB KeyboardType] >
[OK] key
Low Toner Alert
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Low Toner Alert] >
[OK]key
ColorToner Empty
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [ColorToner Empty] >
[OK] key
Show PowerOffMsg
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Show PowerOffMsg] >
[OK] key
Item Description
JobsDetailStatus Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All
Jobs Log Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All
FAX Log Value: Show All, Hide All
Item Description
USB KeyboardType Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use.
Value: US, Europe US, France, Germany
Item Description
Low Toner Alert Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when to order a toner when the
toner is running low.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [Off] alerts you low toner when the amount of remaining toner becomes 5%.
If [On] is selected, set the amount of remaining toner to alert. The setting range is 5 to 100% (in
1% increments).
Item Description
ColorToner Empty Select whether printing is prohibited or the Print in Black and White setting is used for printing
once the color toner runs out.
Value: Stop printing, Print in B & W
Item Description
Show PowerOffMsg Set the mode whether display a confirmation message in power supply off.
Value: Off, On
8-32
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
EnergySaver Set.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [EnergySaver Set.] >
[OK] key
Copy
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Copy] > [OK] key
Configures settings for copying functions.
Item Description
Recovery Level Select the method of recovery from energy saver.
Value:
Full Recovery: This mode enables the use of all functions immediately.
However, this mode saves less energy.
Normal Recovery: In this mode, you can select the method from the following:
enabling the use of all functions immediately or enabling the
use of desired functions only.
If you want to use all functions immediately, press the power
switch to execute recovery.
Power Saving Recovery: This mode enables the use of desired functions only. This
mode saves energy most effectively.
Item Description
Paper Selection Set the default paper selection.
Value: Auto, Def. PaperSource
AutoPaperSelect. If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when the zoom
changes.
Value
MostSuitableSize: Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original.
Same as OrigSize: Select paper that matches the size of the original, regardless the
zoom.
Auto % Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic
zoom (reduce/zoom) is performed.
Value: Off, On
DP Read Action When the document processor is used, select the scanning operation for the document
processor.
Value
Speed Priority: Gives priority to scanning speed.
Quality Priority: Gives priority to image quality at a slightly slower scan speed.
Platen Scan Act. When the platen is used, select the scanning operation for the platen.
Value
Speed Priority: Gives priority to scanning speed.
Quality Priority: Gives priority to image quality at a slightly slower scan speed.
Select Key Set. Commonly used copying functions can be registered to the Select key. Functions can be easily
configured by selecting the Select key.
Value: None, Paper Selection, Collate, Duplex, Zoom, Combine, Original Size,
Orig. Orientation, Mixed Size Orig., Original Image, Density, EcoPrint, Continuous Scan,
File Name Entry, JobFinish Notice, Print Override, Color Selection, Color Balance,
Sharpness, Contrast, Backgrnd Density, Saturation, Skip Blank Page
8-33
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Printer
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Printer] > [OK] key
Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following
settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.
Item Description
Emulation Set. Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of
printers.
Value: PCL6, KPDL, KPDL (Auto)
NOTE
When you have selected [KPDL] or [KPDL (Auto)], set "KPDL Error Rpt", too.
KPDL Error Rpt When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not the
error report is output.
Value: Off, On
Color Setting You can choose whether reports are printed in color or black and white.
Value: Color, Black & White
EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where faded
printing is not a problem.
Value: Off, On
Override A4/LTR Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when
printing.
Value
Off: A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.
On: A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will use whichever size
is in the paper source.
Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode.
Value: Off, Bind Long Edge, Bind Short Edge
Copies Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999.
Value: 1 to 999 copies
Orientation Set the default orientation, [Portrait] or [Landscape].
Value: Portrait, Landscape
Gloss Mode Gloss Mode increases the effect of glossiness in printing. However, printing takes longer time.
Value: Off, On
IMPORTANT
Gloss Mode is not available when [Labels] or [Transparency] is selected as the paper
type setting.
Cassette 1 (2) Set. (Cassette 1 (2) Settings) (page 8-23)
MP Tray Set. (Multipurpose Tray Settings) (page 8-23)
Depending on the paper used, printing in gloss mode may cause curl in paper.
To reduce curl, try using thicker paper.
Wide A4 Turn this to on to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a line for
an A4 page (78 characters at 10 pitch) and Letter size page (80 characters at 10 pitch). This
setting is only effective in PCL6 emulation.
Value: Off, On
8-34
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
FormFeed TimeOut Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no
information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the
preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper. The options are between 5 and
495 seconds.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code 0AH).
Value: LF Only, LF and CR, Ignore LF
CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code (character
code 0DH).
Value: CR Only, LF and CR, Ignore CR
Job Name Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], select the job name to be displayed from [Job Name], [Job No.+Job
Name], or [Job Name+Job No.].
User Name Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed.
Value: Off, On
MP Tray Priority If paper is set in the multipurpose tray then it is possible for priority to be given to that
multipurpose tray in the paper feed.
Value
Off: The printer driver settings are followed.
Auto Feed: If Auto is selected in the printer driver and there is paper in the multipurpose
tray then the paper feed will be from the multipurpose tray.
Always: If there is paper in the multipurpose tray then the paper feed will be from the
multipurpose tray regardless of what is set in the printer driver.
Paper Feed Mode While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper when the paper source and type are
specified.
Value
Auto: Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type.
Fixed: Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source.
Auto Cass.Change Select the following actions when the paper runs out in the paper source while printing.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [Off], the machine displays "Load paper in cassette #." (# is a cassette
number) or "Load paper in MP Tray", and stops printing.
Load the paper according to the paper source displayed to resume printing.
To print from the other paper source, select [Paper]. Select the desired paper source, and then
select the [OK] key.
When selecting [On], the machine continues printing automatically when the other cassette
contains the same paper as the currently-used cassette.
Resolution Set the resolution used for printing.
Value: 600 dpi, 1200 dpi
NOTE
Settings that are received from the printer driver have priority over the operation panel settings.
Item Description
8-35
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Send
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Send] > [OK] key
Configures settings for sending functions.
Item Description
Select Key Set. Commonly used sending functions can be registered to the Select key. Functions can be easily
configured by selecting the Select key.
Value: None, Color Selection, Original Size, Original Image, Scan Resolution,
Sending Size, Zoom, Orig. Orientation, Mixed Size Orig., Continuous Scan, File Format,
File Name Entry, Subject/Body, JobFinish Notice, FAX Resolution, FAX Direct TX,
FAX Delayed TX, FAX RX Polling, FAX TX Report, Density, FTP Encrypted TX,
File Separation, Sharpness, Contrast, Backgrnd Density, Skip Blank Page
DestinationCheck Set the confirmation of destinations. *1
*1 Also applies when sending the fax.
Check beforeSend Select whether to display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing the [Start] key
when performing sending jobs.
Value: Off, On
Check New Dest. When adding new destination, select whether to display the entry check screen to check the
entered destination.
Value: Off, On
New Dest. Entry Select whether to permit direct entry of destination.*1
Value: Permit, Prohibit
Recall Dest. Select whether to permit usage of [Recall] on the Send screen.*1
Value: Permit, Prohibit
Default Screen Use this procedure to set the default screen displayed when you select the [Send] key.
Value: Destination, Address Book
Send and Forward Set whether to send the original to another destination and store it when sending images.
Forward Set the rule to send the original.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], select rules to forward from [E-mail], [Folder (SMB)], [Folder (FTP)] and
[FAX].
Destination Set the destination to which the original is forwarded. One destination can be set. You can
check and edit the set address.
Follow the steps below to register the destination.
• Address Book
• Address Entry
Specifying Destination (page 5-28)
8-36
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
FAX
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [FAX] > [OK] key
Configure settings for FAX.
FAX Operation Guide
Document Box
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Document Box] > [OK] key
Configures settings related to the Job Box, Sub Address Box and Polling Box.
Item Description
Sub Address Box FAX Operation Guide
Job Box Configure settings for Job Box.
Quick Copy Jobs To maintain free space on the box, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.
Value: number between 0 and 300
NOTE
When 0 is set, Quick Copy cannot be used.
JobRet. Deletion This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or Proof and
Hold Printing, saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been
saved for a set time.
Value: Off, 1 hour, 4 hours, 1 day, 1 week
NOTE
This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. Regardless of this function
setting, temporary documents are deleted when the power switch is turned off.
Polling Box FAX Operation Guide
Select Key Set. Commonly used printing and storing functions can be registered to the Select key. Functions
used when printing and when saving can both be registered. Functions can be easily
configured by selecting the Select key.
Value
Print: None, Collate, Paper Selection, Duplex, EcoPrint, File Name Entry,
JobFinish Notice, Print Override, Color Selection*1, Encrypted PDF*1, JPEG/TIFF Print*1,
XPS FitTo Page*1, Del. after Print*2
Store: None, Color Selection
*3
, Original Size, Original Image, Scan Resolution, Storing Size
*3
,
Zoom
*3
, Orig. Orientation, Mixed Size Org., Continuous Scan, File Format
*3
, File Separation
*3
,
File Name Entry, JobFinish Notice, Density, Sharpness
*3
, Contrast
*3
, Backgrnd Density
*3
,
Skip Blank Page
*1 Only displayed when printing from USB memory.
*2 Only displayed when printing from Sub Address Box.
*3 Not displayed when saving to Polling Box.
8-37
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Edit Destination
Address Book
[
System Menu/Counter
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
Edit Destination
] > [
OK
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
Address Book
] > [
OK
] key
Configure settings for address book.
Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-20)
Print List
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Print List] > [OK] key
FAX Operation Guide
AddBookDefaults
[
System Menu/Counter
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
Edit Destination
] > [
OK
] key > [
▲
] [
▼
] key > [
AddBookDefaults
] > [
OK
] key
NOTE
This function does not appear when the External Address Book is not set.
Item Description
Address Book Set the type of address book that appears when the address book is displayed.
Value: Machine AddrBook, Ext Address Book
8-38
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
Adjust/Maint.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Adjust/Maint.] > [OK] key
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.
Item Description
Copy Denst. Adj. Adjust copy density.
Value: -3 Lighter, -2, -1, 0 Normal, +1, +2, +3 Darker
Send/Box Density Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box.
Value: -3 Lighter, -2, -1, 0 Normal, +1, +2, +3 Darker
Contrast (Copy) Increases or decreases the overall contrast of copies.
Value: -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3
Contrast (Send) Increases or decreases the overall contrast when documents are sent or saved in a document
box.
Value: -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3
ColorCalibration This machine contains a calibration function that automatically makes adjustments to
compensate for changes that occur over time due to variations in the ambient temperature and
humidity. This function can be used for fine adjustment of tone and color drift to print in the
optimum color.
ColorCalibration (page 10-27)
If color tone does not improve or color drift does not improve after executing this color
adjustment, refer to the following:
Color Regist. (page 10-28)
Color Regist. When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location, color drift during printing may
occur. Use this function to correct the color position of each of cyan, magenta and yellow to
resolve color drift.
Color Regist. (page 10-28)
Correct. Bk Line Correct fine lines (streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the image, when
the document processor is used.
Value: Off, On
Service Setting Settings for machine maintenance and inspection. This menu is primarily used by service
technicians to perform maintenance.
9-1
9
User Authentication and
Accounting (User Login,
Job Accounting)
This chapter explains the following topics:
Overview of User Login Administration .............................................................................................................. 9-2
Managing the Job Account from PC ........................................................................................................ 9-2
Enabling User Login Administration ................................................................................................................... 9-3
Setting User Login Administration ...................................................................................................................... 9-5
Authentication Security ............................................................................................................................ 9-5
Adding a User (Local User List) ............................................................................................................... 9-6
Changing User Properties ....................................................................................................................... 9-8
User Login Administration for Printing ................................................................................................... 9-10
Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN ............................................................................................ 9-11
Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA ............................................................................................... 9-12
Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC .................................................................................. 9-13
Group Authorization Settings ................................................................................................................. 9-14
Guest Authorization Set. ........................................................................................................................ 9-15
Obtain NW User Property ...................................................................................................................... 9-18
ID Card Settings .................................................................................................................................... 9-19
PIN Login Settings ................................................................................................................................. 9-20
Using User Login Administration ...................................................................................................................... 9-21
Login/Logout .......................................................................................................................................... 9-21
Overview of Job Accounting ............................................................................................................................ 9-22
To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs Printed from a PC ..................................................... 9-22
Enabling Job Accounting ................................................................................................................................. 9-23
Job Accounting Access .......................................................................................................................... 9-24
Setting an Account ........................................................................................................................................... 9-25
Adding an Account ................................................................................................................................. 9-25
Restricting the Use of the Machine ........................................................................................................ 9-27
Editing an Account ................................................................................................................................. 9-28
Deleting an Account ............................................................................................................................... 9-29
Job Accounting for Printing .................................................................................................................... 9-30
Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN ................................................................................................. 9-31
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA ...................................................................................................... 9-32
Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer ................................................................... 9-33
Configuring Job Accounting ............................................................................................................................. 9-34
Default Setting ....................................................................................................................................... 9-34
Counting the Number of Pages Printed ................................................................................................. 9-35
Print Accounting Report ......................................................................................................................... 9-36
Using Job Accounting ...................................................................................................................................... 9-37
Login/Logout .......................................................................................................................................... 9-37
Unknown User Settings ................................................................................................................................... 9-38
Unknown ID Job .................................................................................................................................... 9-38
Registering Information for a User whose ID is Unknown ..................................................................... 9-39
9-2
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of User Login Administration
Overview of User Login Administration
User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter a correct login user
name and password for user authentication to login.
Access are in three levels - "User", "Administrator", and "Machine Administrator". The security levels can be modified
only by the "Machine Administrator".
Managing the Job Account from PC
In addition to the above settings, the following are necessary to manage the job account from PC.
To Manage the Users to Print from PCs
Printer driver settings are necessary to manage the users that print on the machine from PCs.
Managing the Users to Use TWAIN for Scanning
TWAIN driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use TWAIN for scanning.
Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN (page 9-11)
Managing the Users to Use WIA for Scanning
WIA driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use WIA for scanning.
Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA (page 9-12)
Managing the Users to Send Faxes from a PC
FAX driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that send faxes from a PC.
Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC (page 9-13)
UserA
1Enable User Login
Administration
(page 9-3)
2Set the user
(page 9-6)3Enter the login user name and
password and execute the job
(page 2-15)
User A
User B
User C
1Set the User Login Administration
on the printer driver (page 9-10)2Print
9-3
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling User Login Administration
Enabling User Login Administration
Select one of the following authentication methods:
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key
2Configure the settings.
1[▲] [▼] key > [User Login] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >
[Local Authentic.]or[Netwk Authentic.] > [OK] key
When selecting [Netwk Authentic.]
1[▲] [▼] key > [NTLM], [Kerberos] or [Ext.] > [OK] key
2Enter the host name (64 characters or less) for the Authentication Server and select the
[OK] key.
3Select the domain name for the Authentication Server, and select the [OK] key.
If the domain has not been set, select the number where "----------------" is displayed and select
[Menu]. Select [Edit] and select the [OK] key then enter the domain name (in 256 characters or less).
Select the [OK] key and the domain will be registered.
To edit or delete a domain name that has already been registered, select that domain name and
select [Menu].
Item Descriptions
Local Authentication User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the
machine.
Network Authentication
User authentication based on Authentication Server. Use a user property stored
in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page.
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [
Login
]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
NOTE
Select [Off] to disable user login administration.
NOTE
Up to 10 domain names can be registered.
9-4
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling User Login Administration
4When selecting [Ext.] as the server type, enter the port number and select the [OK] key.
NOTE
If the login user name and password are rejected, check the following settings.
• Network Authentication setting of the machine
• User property of the Authentication Server
• Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server
If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator
registered in the local user list and correct the settings.
9-5
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Setting User Login Administration
This registers, alters and deletes users and configures the settings for User Login Administration.
Authentication Security
If user authentication is enabled, configure the user authentication settings.
User Account Lockout Setting
You can prohibit the use of a user account if an incorrect password is entered repeatedly to login with that account.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Account Lockout] > [OK] key
2Configure the settings.
The following settings can be selected.
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [
Login
]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
Item Descriptions
Lockout Select whether or not account lockout policy is enabled.
Value: Off, On
Lockout Policy Specify the conditions and the extent to which the account lockout is
applied.
Number of
Retries
Specify how many login retries are allowed until the account is locked out.
Value: 1 to 10 times
Lockout Duration Specify how long the account is to be locked out until it is unlocked.
Value: 1 to 60 minutes
Lockout Target Specify the extent to which the account lockout is applied. [Remote Only]
locks out all operations from outside the operation panel.
Value: All, Remote Only
Locked out Users Displays a list of locked out users.
To cancel the locks:
Select the [▲] or [▼] key to select the user in the list, and [Select]. A
checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected user.
Select [Menu]. Select [Unlock] and the [OK] key.
9-6
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Adding a User (Local User List)
This adds a new user. You can add up to 20 users (including the default login user name).
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Local User List] > [OK] key >
[Menu] > [▲] [▼] key > [Add User] > [OK] key
NOTE
By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored.
Each user's properties are:
Machine Administrator
User Name: DeviceAdmin
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
Access Level: Machine Administrator
Administrator
User Name: Admin
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
Access Level: Administrator
* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).
It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name and login password regularly for your
security.
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [
Login
]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
9-7
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
2Enter the user information.
1Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters) and select the [OK] key.
2Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters) and select the [OK] key.
3To enter detailed user information, select [▲] [▼] key > [Detail] > [OK] key
To exit the operation, select [▲] [▼] key > [Exit] > [OK] key
4Enter the detailed user information.
Select [Edit], [Change] or [Detail] on each item, enter the information and then select the [OK] key.
Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen. The
table below explains the user information to be registered.
3Select the [OK] key.
A new user is added on the local user list.
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the the following:
Character Entry Method (page 11-8)
NOTE
The same login user name cannot be registered.
Item Descriptions
User Name*1
*1 Mandatory at user registration.
Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
Login User
Name*1 Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters). The same login user
name cannot be registered.
Login Password Enter the password to login (up to 64 characters). Reenter the same
password for confirmation and select the [OK] key.
Access Level*1 Select "Administrator" or "User" for user access privileges.
Account Name Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who registered his/her
account name, can login without entering the account ID.
Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-22)
ID Card
Information
Register ID card information. Select [Change] > [▲] [▼] key > [Read] > [OK]
key.
To delete IC card information, select [Change] > [▲] [▼] key > [Delete] >
[OK] key.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is
activated.
Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit" (page 11-4)
9-8
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Changing User Properties
Types of user properties that could be changed may be different depending on user access privilege.
For a user with administrator rights who logs in
User properties can be changed and users can be deleted. The items, which can be added, are all able to be changed.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Local User List] > [OK] key
2Change the user properties.
Changing user properties
1Select the user whose properties you wish to change, and the [OK] key.
2Refer to step 2 of "Adding a User (Local User List)" to change a user property.
3[OK] key > [Yes]
The user information is changed.
Deleting a user
1Select the user whose properties you wish to delete, and [Menu].
2[▲] [▼] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]
The selected user will be deleted.
NOTE
To change the user information of the machine administrator, you must log in with machine administrator authority.
You can only view user information if you log in as a regular user.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [
Login
]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-6)
NOTE
The default user with machine administrator rights cannot be deleted.
9-9
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
To change the user information of logged in user (User Property)
These users can partially change their own user properties including user name and login password.
Although "Login User Name", "Access Level", or "Account Name" cannot be changed, the users can check the present
status.
1Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User Property] > [OK] key
2Change the user properties.
1Refer to step 2 of "Adding a User (Local User List)" to change a user property.
2[OK] key > [Yes]
The user information is changed.
Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-6)
Item Description
User Name Changes the name shown on the user list. Up to 32 characters can be
entered.
Login User Name Displays the login user name that is entered at login.
Login Password Changes the password that is entered at login. Up to 64 characters
can be entered.
Access Level Displays the user's access level.
Account Name Displays the account where the user belongs.
ID Card Information Displays the ID card information of the logged in user.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is
activated.
Optional Applications (page 11-6)
This function does not appear when the server type is set to [Ext.] in
Network Authentication, and logged in with the user account
certificated in the server specified as the [Ext.] server type.
9-10
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
User Login Administration for Printing
It is possible to manage the users that print on this machine from a PC.
Setting Printer Driver
To manage the users that print on this machine from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the printer driver.
Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1Display the screen.
1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices
and Printers].
2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of
the printer driver.
3Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.
2Configure the settings.
1Select [User Login] on the [User Login] tab.
2Set the User Login Administration.
[Use specific name]: This option can be used to specify a user name and password to use
the same User login for every print job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to
type the name and password for each print job.
[Prompt for name]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be displayed
when attempting a printing. The user name and password must be entered each time a
printing is attempted.
[Prompt for name and validate]: A screen for entering the user name and password will
be displayed when attempting a printing. The user name and password stored in the Login
user name list needs to be entered. The user name and password must be entered each
time a printing is attempted.
[Validate user name (computer) or prompt for login user name]: When printing, the
Windows user name is searched in the "Login user names" and printing is possible if the
name is registered. If the name is not registered, the printing will be canceled for users with
only user authority. If the user has administrator privileges, the screen to enter the user
name and password will appear.
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and
Printers].
1
2
9-11
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
3Click [OK].
Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN
It is possible to manage the users that scan using TWAIN.
Setting TWAIN Driver
To manage the users that scan using TWAIN, the following settings are necessary in the TWAIN driver. Instructions are
based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1Display the screen.
1Select [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Click
[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list then the TWAIN Driver Setting screen appears.
2Select the machine, and click [Edit].
2Configure the settings.
1Click [User Authentication Settings].
2Select the checkbox beside [Authentication], and enter Login User Name and Password.
3Click [OK].
NOTE
For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:
Printer Driver User Guide
NOTE
In Windows 7, select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Kyocera] and then
[TWAIN Driver Setting].
9-12
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA
It is possible to manage the users that scan using WIA.
Setting WIA Driver
To manage the users that scan using WIA, the following settings are necessary in the WIA driver. Instructions are based
on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1Display the screen.
1Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Scanner" in the search box. Click [View scanners
and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.
2Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].
2Configure the settings.
1Select the checkbox beside [Authentication] on the [Settings] tab, and enter Login User
Name and Password.
2Click [OK].
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and
File Search]. Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners
and Cameras screen appears.
1
2
12
9-13
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC
It is possible to manage the users that send faxes from a PC.
Setting FAX Driver
To manage the users that send faxes from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the FAX driver. Instructions are
based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1Display the screen.
1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices
and Printers].
2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of
the printer driver.
3Click [FAX TX Setting] on the [Printing Preferences] window.
2Configure the settings.
1Select [User Login] on the [Authentication] tab.
2Set the User Login Administration.
[Use Specific Login User Name]: This option can be used to specify a user name and
password to use the same User login for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user
does not have to type the name and password for each FAX job.
[Prompt for Login User Name]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be
displayed when attempting a transmission. The user name and password must be entered
each time a transmission is attempted.
3Click [OK].
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and
Printers].
1
2
9-14
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Group Authorization Settings
Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server.
Group Authorization
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key
2Configure the setting.
[▲] [▼] key > [Group Auth.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Off] or [On] > [OK] key
NOTE
• To use the group authorization settings, [Netwk Authentic.] must be selected for the authentication method in
"Enabling User Login Administration". Select "On" for "LDAP" in "Protocol Settings".
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
ProtocolSettings (page 8-12)
• Setting to use group authorization is performed from the operation panel. The groups should be registered with
Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [
Login
]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
9-15
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Guest Authorization Set.
When User Login Administration is enabled, set the functions that guest users who cannot log in to the machine are
allowed to use.
Enabling Guest Authorization
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Guest Auth. Set.] >
[OK]key> [▲] [▼] key > [Guest Auth.] > [OK] key
2Configure the setting.
[▲] [▼] key > [On] or [Off] > [OK] key
NOTE
To use Guest Authorization Set., User Login Administration must be enabled in "Enabling User Login Administration".
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [
Login
]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
NOTE
If the guest authorization setting is enabled, the [Authentication/Logout] key must be
selected when logging in.
In the guest user default settings, only monochrome copying can be used. If you wish to use
a different function, log in as a user who can use that function, or change the settings in the
guest properties.
9-16
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Configuring Guest Property
Register guest user information and functions that are restricted.
The table below explains the user information to be registered.
Item Descriptions
User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
The default setting is "Guest User".
Access Level The authority of the user appears. This cannot be changed.
Account Name Add an account where the user belongs.
Auth. Rules Set usage authority for each user.
The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows.
Print Restrict: Printer
Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is prohibited.
Print Restrict: Printer (Full Color)
Select whether or not use of the print function (color) of the printer is prohibited.
Print Restrict: Copy
Select whether or not use of the copy print function is prohibited.
Print Restrict: Copy (Full Color)
Select whether or not use of the copy print function (full color) is prohibited.
Duplex Restrict
Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.
Combine Restrict
Specify whether only Combine is allowed.
EcoPrint Restr.
Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.
Send Restrict
Select whether or not use of the send function is prohibited.
FAX Restrict.
Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited.
Storing in Box:
Select whether or not use of the box store function is prohibited.
StoringinMemory:
Select whether or not use of the removable memory store function is prohibited.
9-17
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key
2Configure the settings.
1[▲] [▼] key > [Guest Auth. Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Guest Property] > [OK] key
2Register guest user information and functions that are restricted.
Select [Edit], [Change] or [Detail] on each item, enter the information and then select the [OK] key.
Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen.
3Select the [OK] key.
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [
Login
]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
9-18
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Obtain NW User Property
Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server. The user name obtained with this
setting is shown in the user information, the status confirmation screen, and the header of E-mail.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key
2Configure the settings.
[▲] [▼] key > [NW User Property] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Off] or [On] > [OK] key
NOTE
• To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server, [Netwk Authentic.] must be selected for the
authentication method in "Enabling User Login Administration". Select "On" for "LDAP" in "ProtocolSettings".
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
ProtocolSettings (page 8-12)
• Setting to obtain network user information is performed from the operation panel. The details of the information to be
obtained should be set with Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [
Login
]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
9-19
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
ID Card Settings
If ID card authentication is enabled, select the authentication type.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key
2Configure the settings.
[▲] [▼] key > [ID Card Settings] > [OK] key
The following settings can be selected.
NOTE
This functions appears when the Card Authentication Kit is activated.
Optional Applications (page 11-6)
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [
Login
]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
Item Descriptions
Key Login When ID card authentication is enabled, select whether or not login by
keyboard is allowed.
Value: Permit, Prohibit
Additional Auth.*1
*1 This function does not appear when the server type is set to [NTLM] or [Kerberos] in "Network
Authentication".
Select whether or not to require password entry after authenticating by ID
card.
Value: Off, Use Password, Use PIN Code*2
*2 This function appear when [Network Authentication] is selected for the authentication method and
the server type is set to [Ext.] in "Network Authentication".
9-20
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
PIN Login Settings
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key
2Configure the settings.
[▲] [▼] key > [PIN Login] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > Select [Off] or [On] > [OK] key
NOTE
This setting is only displayed when [Network Authentication] must be selected for the authentication method and the
server type is set to [Ext.] in "Network Authentication".
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [
Login
]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
9-21
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using User Login Administration
Using User Login Administration
This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.
Login/Logout
If user login administration is enabled, the login user name and login password entry screen appears each time you use
this machine.
Login
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, log in by referring to the following:
Login (page 2-15)
Logout
When the operations are complete, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the login user name and login
password entry screen.
9-22
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of Job Accounting
Overview of Job Accounting
Job accounting manages the copy/print/scan/FAX count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each
account.
To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs
Printed from a PC
To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need to configure settings by using the
printer driver on the PC.
Managing the Scan Job Account by Using TWAIN
To manage the scan job account by using TWAIN, you need to configure the TWAIN driver settings on the computer
connected to the machine.
Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN (page 9-31)
Managing the Scan Job Account by Using WIA
To manage the scan job account by using WIA, you need to configure the WIA driver settings on the computer
connected to the machine.
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA (page 9-32)
Managing the FAX Job Transmitted from a PC
To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the PC, you need to configure the settings by using the FAX Driver
on the PC.
Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer (page 9-33)
100 400 200
A: 00000001
1Enable job
accounting. (page
9-23)
3Enter the assigned account
ID when performing the
job. (page 9-37)
4Count the number of pages
copied, printed, scanned
and faxed.
2Setting an
account. (page
9-25)
A: 00000001
B: 00000002
C: 00000003
100 400 200
1Set Job Accounting for the PC on
the network by using the printer
driver. (page 9-30)
2Execute printing. 3Count the number of
pages printed.
9-23
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling Job Accounting
Enabling Job Accounting
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
2[▲] [▼] key > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key
2Configure the settings.
[▲] [▼] key > [Job Accounting] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [On] > [OK] key
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [
Login
]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
NOTE
• To disable job accounting, select [Off].
• When the display returns to System Menu default screen, logout is automatically executed
and the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To continue the operation, enter the
Account ID.
9-24
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling Job Accounting
Job Accounting Access
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
2[▲] [▼] key > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key
2Configure the settings.
[▲] [▼] key > [
AccountingAccess
] > [
OK
] key > [▲] [▼] key > [
Local
] or [
Network
] > [
OK
] key
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [
Login
]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
9-25
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account
Setting an Account
You can add, change and delete an account and set the restriction for each account.
Adding an Account
Up to 20 individual accounts can be added. The following entries are required.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu/Counter] key >
[▲] [▼] key >
[User/Job Account] > [OK] key
2
[▲] [▼] key >
[Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key >
[▲] [▼] key >
[Account. List] > [OK] key >
[Menu] >
[▲] [▼] key >
[Add Account] > [OK] key
2Enter the account information.
1Enter the account name > [OK] key
2Enter the account ID > [OK] key
3To apply restriction to the account ID, select [▲] [▼] key > [Detail] > [OK] key.
To exit the operation, select [▲] [▼] key > [Exit] > [OK] key.
Item Descriptions
Account Name Enter the account name (up to 32 characters).
Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999).
Restriction This prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load.
Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-27)
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [
Login
]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the the following:
Character Entry Method (page 11-8)
NOTE
Any "Account ID" that has already registered cannot be used. Enter any other account
ID.
9-26
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account
4Check the account name and account ID and set the use restrictions.
To change the details, select [Edit], enter the information and then select the [OK] key. Select the [►]
key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen.
5Select the [OK] key.
A new account is added on the account list.
Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-27)
9-27
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account
Restricting the Use of the Machine
This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available.
The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether "Individual" or "Total" is selected for "Copy/Print Count".
Copy/Print Count (page 9-34)
Restriction Items
"Individual" selected for Copy/Printer Count"Split" selected for Copy/Printer Count
"Total" selected for Copy/Printer Count
Applying Restriction
Item Descriptions
Print Restrict Copy (Total) Limits the number of sheets used for copying.
Print Restrict Copy (Full Color) Limits the number of pages used for full-color copying.
Print Restrict Printer (Total) Limits the number of sheets used for printing.
Print Restrict Printer (Full Color) Limits the number of pages used for color printing.
Scan Restrict. Others Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restrict Limits the number of sheets sent by fax.
Item Descriptions
Print Restrict Total Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.
Print Restrict Full Color Limits the number of pages used for full-color printing.
Scan Restrict. Others Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restrict Limits the number of sheets sent by fax.
Item Descriptions
Off No restriction is applied.
Counter Limit*1
*1 If [Counter Limit] is selected, the [Limit Pages] screen appears after the [OK] key is selected. Enter a counter limit on
pages using the numeric keys, and select the [OK] key.
Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.
Reject Usage Restriction is applied.
9-28
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account
Editing an Account
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
2[▲] [▼] key > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Account. List] > [OK] key
2Edit an account.
1Select the account you want to change and select the [OK] key.
2Refer to step 2 of "Adding an Account" and "Restricting the Use of the Machine" to change
account information.
3[OK] key > [Yes]
The account information is changed.
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [
Login
]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
NOTE
The account information can be changed by selecting [Menu], selecting [Detail/Edit] and
then selecting the [OK] key.
Adding an Account (page 9-25)
Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-27)
9-29
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account
Deleting an Account
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
2[▲] [▼] key > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Account. List] > [OK] key
2Delete an account.
1Select the account you want to delete and [Menu].
2[▲] [▼] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]
The account is deleted.
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [
Login
]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
9-30
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account
Job Accounting for Printing
The number of jobs to be printed from the computer can be managed by Job Accounting.
Setting Printer Driver
To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need configure the following settings by
using the printer driver on the PC. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1Display the screen.
1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices
and Printers].
2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of
the printer driver.
3Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.
2Configure the settings.
1Select [Job accounting] on the [Job Accounting] tab.
2Set the Account ID.
[Use specific account ID]:
Enter the Account ID. Printing will be performed using the
entered Account ID. If this option is selected, the user does not have to enter the Account ID
for each print job.
[Prompt for account ID]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when
attempting a printing. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted.
[Prompt for account ID and validate]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be
displayed when attempting a printing. The Account ID stored in the Account ID list needs to
be entered. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted.
[Display account ID list]: The Account ID list is displayed when printing. The Account ID
to be used needs to be selected from the list.
[Validate user name (computer) or prompt for account ID]: When printing, the Windows
user name is searched in the "Account IDs" and printing is possible if the name is
registered. If the Account ID is not registered, the screen for entering the Account ID will
appear.
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and
Printers].
1
2
9-31
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account
3Click [OK].
Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN
The number of jobs scanned by using TWAIN can be managed by Job Accounting.
Setting TWAIN Driver
To manage the number of jobs scanned by using TWAIN, you need to configure the following settings by using the
TWAIN Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1Display the screen.
1Select [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Click
[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list then the TWAIN Driver Setting screen appears.
2Select the machine, click [Edit].
2Configure the settings.
1Click [User Authentication Settings].
2Select the checkbox beside [Account], and enter the account ID.
3Click [OK].
NOTE
For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:
Printer Driver User Guide
NOTE
In Windows 7, select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Kyocera] and then
[TWAIN Driver Setting].
9-32
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA
The number of jobs scanned by using WIA can be managed by Job Accounting.
Setting WIA Driver
To manage the number of jobs scanned by using WIA, you need to configure the following settings by using the WIA
Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1Display the screen.
1Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Scanner" in the search box. Click [View scanners
and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.
2Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].
2Configure WIA Driver.
1Select the checkbox beside [Account ID] on the [Settings] tab, and enter the Account ID.
2Click [OK].
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and
File Search]. Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners
and Cameras screen appears.
1
2
1
2
9-33
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account
Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a
Computer
The number of FAX jobs transmitted from the computer can be managed by Job Accounting.
Setting FAX Driver
To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the computer, you need to configure the following settings by using
the FAX Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1Display the screen.
1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices
and Printers].
2Right click the name of the machine to be used as the FAX Driver and select
[Printing preferences] from the resulting pull-down menu.
3Click [FAX TX Setting] in the [Printing Preferences] window.
2Configure the settings.
1Select [Job Accounting] on the [Authentication] tab.
2Set the Job Accounting.
[Use Specific Account ID]: This option can be used to specify an account ID to use the
same Account ID for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to
enter the Account ID for each FAX job.
[Prompt for Account ID]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when
attempting a transmission. The Account ID must be entered each time a transmission is
attempted.
3Click [OK].
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and
Printers].
1
2
9-34
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Configuring Job Accounting
Default Setting
Set the defaults for job accounting. To configure the settings, select the item in Default Setting and select the setting
item.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Job Account.Set.] >
[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Default Setting] > [OK] key
For details on each function, see the table below.
Item Description
Apply Limit This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction.
The table below describes the action taken.
Value
Immediately: Job stops when the counter reaches its limit. The next job will be
prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.
Subsequently: Printing/scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be
rejected.
Alert Only: Job continues while displaying an alert message.
Copy/Print Count You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or
each of copying and printing individually (Split). The selection may influence restriction on the
count and count method.
Value: Total, Individual
Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-27)
Print Accounting Report (page 9-36)
Counter Limit When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets
used. You can set any number from 1 to 9,999,999.
The items that can be set differ depending on whether [Individual] or [Total] is selected for
[Copy/Print Count].
Copy/Print Count (page 9-34)
[Split] selected for Copy/Printer Count
Copy (Total) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for copying.
Copy (Full Color) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for full-color copying.
Printer (Total) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for printing.
Print. (Full Col.) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for color printing.
Scan (Others) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying).
FAX TX Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes.
[Total] selected for Copy/Printer Count
Print (Total) Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.
Print (Full Col.) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for full-color printing.
Scan (Others) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying).
FAX TX Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes.
9-35
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Counting the Number of Pages Printed
Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting. A new count can also be started after
resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Job Account.Set.] >
[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Total Accounting] or [Each Job Account] > [OK] key
Total Accounting
This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same time.
Each Job Account
This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account. When checking Each Job
Accounting, select the account for which you want to check the count.
Types of the counts are as follows.
To check other items, select the [OK] key to return to the screen one level higher.
Item Descriptions
Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed, and the total number of pages used. You can
also use [FAX RX Pages], [Duplex Pages] and [Combine Pages] to check the number of
pages used.
Copy/Print Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed, and the total number of pages used. Select
the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen.
FAX RX Pages Displays the number of pages received.
Total PrintPages Displays the total number of pages used for copying and printing.
Duplex Pages Displays the number of pages printed in [1-Sided] mode, [2-Sided] mode, and the total pages
in both modes. Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the
previous screen.
Combine Pages Displays the number of pages printed in [None] (no Combine) mode, [2 in 1] mode, [4 in 1]
mode, and the total pages in both modes. Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the
[◄] key to return to the previous screen.
Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, faxing and other functions, as well as the
total number of pages scanned. Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key
to return to the previous screen.
FAX TX Pages Displays the number of pages faxed.
FAX TX Time Displays the total duration of FAX transmissions.
Counter Reset Resets the counter.
Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
9-36
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Print Accounting Report
The total pages counted of all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.
Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered.
When "Individual" is selected for Managing the Copy/Printer Count.
1Prepare paper.
Check that A4 or Letter paper is loaded in the cassette.
2Display the screen.
1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
2[▲] [▼] key > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key
3Print the report.
[▲] [▼] key > [Account. Report] > [OK] key > [Yes]
Accounting report is printed.
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [
Login
]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
ACCOUNT. REPORT
9-37
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using Job Accounting
Using Job Accounting
This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.
Login/Logout
If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.
Login
When the screen for entry of account codes on the machine appears, perform the following.
1Enter the account ID using the numeric keys > [OK] key
When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears
If user login administration is enabled, the screen to enter the login user name and password
appears. Enter a login user name and password to login. If the user has already registered the
account information, the account ID entry would be skipped.
2Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.
Logout
When the operations are complete, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the account ID entry screen.
NOTE
• If you entered a wrong character, select the [Clear] key and enter the account ID again.
• If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID, a warning beep will sound and
login will fail. Enter the correct account ID.
• By selecting [Counter], you can refer to the number of pages printed and the number of
pages scanned.
Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-6)
9-38
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Unknown User Settings
Unknown User Settings
Unknown ID Job
This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown or unsent login user names or User ID. If the User
Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid, follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown.
The setting items are as follows.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
2[▲] [▼] key > [Unknown User] key > [OK] key
2Configure the settings.
[▲] [▼] key > [Unknown ID Job] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Reject] or [Permit] > [OK] key
Item Descriptions
Permit The job is permitted to be printed.
Reject The job is rejected (not printed).
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [
Login
]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
9-39
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Unknown User Settings
Registering Information for a User whose ID is
Unknown
If you register user information for a user whose ID is unknown, you can check information on the Job Status or Job
History screens. In addition, you can restrict available functions.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
2[▲] [▼] key > [Unknown User] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User Property] > [OK] key
2Enter the user information.
The table below explains the user information to be registered.
NOTE
This functions appears when [Unknown ID Job] is set to [Permit].
Unknown ID Job (page 9-38)
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [
Login
]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
Item Descriptions
User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
NOTE
This is displayed when user login administration is enabled.
Account Name Add an account where the user belongs.
Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-22)
NOTE
This is displayed when job accounting is enabled.
Auth. Rules Set usage authority.
Select [Detail], select [Edit] for each item, change the limits, and select the
[OK] key. Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [►] key to
return to the previous screen.
The following restriction items are available:
Print Restriction:
Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is prohibited.
Print Restriction (Color):
Select whether or not use of the print function (color) of the printer is
prohibited.
10-1
10 Troubleshooting
This chapter explains the following topics:
Regular Maintenance ....................................................................................................................................... 10-2
Cleaning ................................................................................................................................................. 10-2
Cleaning Glass Platen ........................................................................................................................... 10-2
Cleaning Slit Grass ................................................................................................................................ 10-3
Cleaning Paper Transfer Unit ................................................................................................................ 10-4
Toner Container Replacement ............................................................................................................... 10-5
Loading Paper ....................................................................................................................................... 10-8
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................... 10-9
Solving Malfunctions .............................................................................................................................. 10-9
Machine Operation Trouble ................................................................................................................... 10-9
Printed Image Trouble ......................................................................................................................... 10-12
Color printing trouble ........................................................................................................................... 10-15
Responding to Messages .................................................................................................................... 10-16
Adjustment/Maintenance ............................................................................................................................... 10-27
Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance ................................................................................................. 10-27
ColorCalibration ................................................................................................................................... 10-27
Color Regist. ........................................................................................................................................ 10-28
Clearing Paper Jams ..................................................................................................................................... 10-32
Jam Location Indicators ....................................................................................................................... 10-32
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1 ........................................................................................... 10-33
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 2 ........................................................................................... 10-34
Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray ......................................................................... 10-36
Remove any jammed paper in Rear Cover 1 ....................................................................................... 10-39
Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor .................................................................... 10-42
10-2
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Regular Maintenance
Cleaning
Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum printing quality.
Cleaning Glass Platen
Wipe the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild
detergent.
CAUTION
For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.
IMPORTANT
Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.
10-3
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Cleaning Slit Grass
When using the document processor, clean the slit glass surface and the reading guide with the dry cloth.
IMPORTANT
Do not use water, soap or solvents for cleaning.
NOTE
Dirt on the slit glass or the reading guide may cause black streaks to appear in the output.
10-4
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Cleaning Paper Transfer Unit
The paper transfer unit should be cleaned each time the toner container is replaced. To maintain optimum print quality, it
is also recommended that the inside of the machine be cleaned once a month as well as when the toner container is
replaced.
Print problems such as soiling of the reverse side of printed pages may occur if the paper transfer unit becomes dirty.
Wipe away the paper dust on the registration roller and the paper ramp using the cloth.
CAUTION
Some parts are very hot inside the machine. Exercise caution as there is a risk of burn injury.
IMPORTANT
Be careful not to touch the transfer roller and transfer belt during cleaning as this
may adversely affect print quality.
Transfer Belt
Registration Roller(Metal)
Transfer Roller
Paper Ramp
10-5
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Toner Container Replacement
When toner is empty, the following message will be displayed.
"Replace [C][M][Y][K] toner."
When toner runs low, the following message will be displayed. Make sure you have a new toner container available for
replacement.
"Toner is low. (Replace when empty.)"
Frequency of Toner Container Replacement
The life of the toner containers depends on the amount of toner required to accomplish your printing jobs. According to
ISO/IEC 19798 and EcoPrint switched off the toner container can print as follows (A4/Letter paper is assumed):
There are 2 types of toner containers with different amounts of toner.
Replacing the Toner Container
Installation procedures of the toner container is same for every color. Here, we'll explain the yellow toner container, as
an example.
1Open the right cover.
Toner Color Life of the Toner Container (Printable pages)
Black 1,200 images / 2,600 images
Cyan 1,200 images / 2,200 images
Magenta 1,200 images / 2,200 images
Yellow 1,200 images / 2,200 images
NOTE
• The average number of pages that can be printed with each of the toner containers provided with the machine is
1,200 pages.
• To maintain quality, we recommend using genuine Kyocera toner containers, which must pass numerous quality
inspections.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
10-6
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
2Unlock the toner container.
3Remove the toner container.
4Put used toner containers into the plastic waste bag.
10-7
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
5Remove the new toner container from the box.
6Shake the toner container.
7Install the toner container.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the points shown below.
5~65~6
10-8
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
8Close the right cover.
Loading Paper
When Cassette # runs out of paper, the following messages will be displayed.
"Load paper in cassette #." (# is a cassette number)
"Load paper in MP tray."
Loading Paper (page 3-2)
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 5-5)
NOTE
• If the right cover does not close, check that the new toner container is installed correctly.
• Return the exhausted toner container to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container will be
recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
NOTE
If [Paper Setup Msg] is set to [On], the confirmation screen for the paper setting will be displayed when a new paper
is set. If a paper is changed, select [Change] and then change the settings of the paper.
Cassette 1 to 2 (page 8-22)
MP Tray (page 8-22)
10-9
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Solving Malfunctions
The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving.
If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following
pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.
Machine Operation Trouble
When the following machine operation troubles occur, implement appropriate procedures.
NOTE
When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary.
To check the serial number, refer to the following:
Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page i)
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
The screen does not
respond when the power
switch is turned on.
Check the power cord. Connect both ends of the power cord
securely.
page 2-9
Pressing the [Start] key
does not produce copies.
Is there a message on the screen? Determine the appropriate response to
the message and respond accordingly.
page 10-16
Is the machine in Sleep mode? Select the [Energy Saver] key. page 2-26
Blank sheets are ejected. Are the originals loaded correctly? When placing originals on the platen,
place them face-down and align them
with the original size indicator plates.
page 5-2
When placing originals in the document
processor, place them face-up.
page 5-3
―Check that the settings of the
application software.
―
Paper often jams. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. page 3-4
―Turn the orientation 180 degrees around
in which the paper is positioned.
page 3-4
Is the paper of the supported type? Is it
in good condition?
Remove the paper, turn it over, and
reload it.
page 3-4
Is the paper curled, folded or wrinkled? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4
Are there any loose scraps or jammed
paper in the machine?
Remove any jammed paper. page 10-32
2 or more sheets are
overlaps when ejected.
(multi feed)
―Load the paper correctly. page 3-2
10-10
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Printouts are wrinkled. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. page 3-2
―Turn the orientation 180 degrees around
in which the paper is positioned.
page 3-2
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-2
Printouts are curled. ―Turn the paper over in the cassette, or
turn the orientation 180 degrees around
in which the paper is positioned.
page 3-2
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-2
Cannot print. Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC outlet. ―
Is the machine powered on? Turn on the power switch. page 2-10
Are the USB cable and network cable
connected?
Connect the correct USB cable and
network cable securely.
page 2-8
Is the print job paused? Resume printing. page 7-13
Cannot print with USB
memory.
USB memory not
recognized.
Is the USB host blocked? Select [Unblock] in the USB host
settings.
page 8-17
―Check that the USB memory is securely
plugged into the machine.
―
While "Auto-IP" is set to
[On], the IP address is not
assigned automatically.
Is a value other than "0.0.0.0" entered
for the IP address of TCP/IP(v4)?
Enter "0.0.0.0" for the IP address of
TCP/IP(v4).
page 2-18
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
10-11
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Cannot send via SMB. Is the network cable connected? Connect the correct network cable
securely.
page 2-8
Have the network settings for the
equipment been configured properly?
Configure the TCP/IP settings properly. page 8-10
Have the folder sharing settings been
configured properly?
Check sharing settings and access
privileges under the folder properties.
page 3-12
Has the SMB protocol been set to [On]? Set the SMB protocol setting to [On]. page 8-13
Has [Host Name] been entered
properly? *1 Check the name of the computer to
which data is being sent.
page 5-16
Has [Path] been entered properly? Check the share name for the shared
folder.
page 5-16
Has [Login User Name] been entered
properly? *1 *2 Check the domain name and login user
name.
page 5-16
Has the same domain name been used for
[
Host Name
] and [
Login User Name
]?
Delete the domain name and backslash
("/") from [
Login User Name
].
page 5-16
Has [Login Password] been entered
properly?
Check the login password. page 5-16
Have exceptions for Windows Firewall
been configured properly?
Configure exceptions for Windows
Firewall properly.
page 3-15
Do the time settings for the equipment,
domain server, and data destination
computer differ?
Set the equipment, domain server, and
data destination computer to the same
time.
―
Is the screen displaying Send error? Refer to Responding to Send Error.page 10-24
Cannot send via the e-mail. Is the E-mail send size limit set in the
SMTP server registered on the
machine?
Check the limit value is entered to "E-
mail Size Limit" of [E-mail] setting in
Command Center RX and change the
value as necessary.
page 2-51
The machine is emitting
steam in the area around the
paper ejection slot.
Check the room temperature to see if it
is low, or if damp paper was used.
Depending on the printing environment
and the paper's condition, the heat
generated during printing will cause the
moisture in the paper to evaporate, and
the steam emitted may look like smoke.
This is not a problem, and you can
continue printing. If the steam concerns
you, raise the room temperature, or
replace the paper with a newer, dryer
paper.
―
*1 You can also enter a full computer name as the host name (for example, pc001.abcdnet.com).
*2 You can also enter login user names in the following formats:
Domain_name/user_name (for example, abcdnet/james.smith)
User_name@domain_name (for example, james.smith@abcdnet)
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
10-12
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Printed Image Trouble
When the following printed image trouble occurs, implement appropriate procedures.
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Printed images are totally
too light.
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-2
Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. page 6-17
page 8-38
Is the toner distributed evenly within the
toner container?
Shake the toner container from side to
side several times.
page 10-5
Is EcoPrint mode enabled? Disable [EcoPrint] mode. page 8-33
―Make sure the paper type setting is
correct for the paper being used.
page 8-21
―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key
> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >
[Drum Refresh], and then select [Yes].
―
―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key
> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >
[LaserScanner Cln], and then select
[Yes].
―
―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key
> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >
[DEV-CLN], and then select [Yes].
―
Printouts are too dark even
though the background of
the scanned original is white.
Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. page 6-17
page 8-38
―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key
> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >
[Drum Refresh], and then select [Yes].
―
―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key
> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >
[MC] and increase the adjustment value.
Increase the adjustment value 1 level at
a time from the current value. If there is
no improvement after the value is
increased by 1 level, increase by 1 level
again. If there is still no improvement,
return the setting to the original value.
―
Copies have a moire pattern
(dots grouped together in
patterns and not aligned
uniformly).
Is the original a printed photograph? Set the original image to [Photo]. page 6-16
―When making copies
Set [
Sharpness
] to a value from [
-1
] to [
-3
].
page 6-20
―When making copies
Select the [System Menu/Counter] key
> [Copy] > [DP Read Action] or [Platen
Scan Act.], and set to [Quality
Priority].
page 8-32
page 8-32
Texts are not clearly printed. Did you choose appropriate image
quality for the original?
Select appropriate image quality. page 6-16
―When making copies
Set [Sharpness] to a value from [+1] to
[+3].
page 6-20
10-13
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Black or colored points
appear in white background
parts of the image.
Is the original holder or the glass platen
dirty?
Clean the original holder or the glass
platen.
page 10-2
―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key
> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >
[Drum Refresh], and then select [Yes].
―
―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key
> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >
[MC] and increase the adjustment value.
Increase the adjustment value 1 level at
a time from the current value. If there is
no improvement after the value is
increased by 1 level, increase by 1 level
again. If there is still no improvement,
return the setting to the original value.
―
White or color dots appear
on the printed images.
―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key
> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >
[MC] and decrease the adjustment
value. Decrease the adjustment value 1
level at a time from the current value. If
there is no improvement after the value
is decreased by 1 level, decrease by 1
level again. If there is still no
improvement, return the setting to the
original value.
―
―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key
> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >
[DEV-CLN], and then select [Yes].
―
Printed images are fuzzy. Is the machine being used in conditions
of very humid, or humidity or
temperature rapidly changes?
Use in an environment that has suitable
humidity.
―
―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key
> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >
[Drum Refresh], and then select [Yes].
―
Printed images are skewed. Are the originals placed correctly?
When placing originals on the platen, align
them with the original size indicator plates.
page 5-2
When placing originals in the document
processor, align the original width guides
securely before placing the originals.
page 5-3
Is the paper loaded correctly? Check the position of the paper width
guides.
page 3-2
Irregular horizontal lines
appear in the image.
―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key
> [Adjustment/Maintenance] >
[Service Setting] > [MC] and increase
the adjustment value. Increase the
adjustment value 1 level at a time from
the current value. If there is no
improvement after the value is
increased by 1 level, increase by 1 level
again. If there is still no improvement,
return the setting to the original value.
―
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
10-14
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The altitude is 1000 m or
higher and irregular
horizontal white lines appear
in the image.
―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key
> [Adjustment/Maintenance] >
[Service Setting] > [Altitude
Adjustment], and set to an elevation
one level higher than the current setting.
―
The altitude is 1000 m or
higher and dots appear in
the image.
―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key
> [Adjustment/Maintenance] >
[Service Setting] > [Altitude
Adjustment], and set to an elevation
one level higher than the current setting.
―
Printouts have vertical lines.
Is the slit glass dirty? Clean the slit glass. page 10-3
―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key
> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >
[LaserScanner Cln], and then select
[Yes].
―
Dirt on the top edge or back
of the paper.
Is the interior of the machine dirty? Clean the interior of the machine. page 10-4
Part of the image is
periodically faint or shows
white lines.
―Open and then close the rear cover. ―
―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key
> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >
[Drum Refresh], and then select [Yes].
―
―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key
> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >
[MC] and decrease the adjustment
value. Decrease the adjustment value 1
level at a time from the current value. If
there is no improvement after the value
is decreased by 1 level, decrease by 1
level again. If there is still no
improvement, return the setting to the
original value.
―
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
10-15
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Color printing trouble
When the following color printing trouble occurs, implement appropriate procedures.
The previous image remains
and lightly printed.
―Make sure the paper type setting is
correct for the paper being used.
page 8-20
―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key
> [Adjustment/Maintenance] >
[Service Setting] > [MC] and increase
the adjustment value. Increase the
adjustment value 1 level at a time from
the current value. If there is no
improvement after the value is
increased by 1 level, increase by 1 level
again. If there is still no improvement,
return the setting to the original value.
―
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Skewed-color printout. ―Run [ColorCalibration]. page 10-27
―Run [Color Regist.]. page 10-28
Colors appear different than
you anticipated.
Did you choose appropriate image
quality for the original?
Select appropriate image quality. page 6-16
Have you loaded color copy paper into
the paper tray?
Load color copy paper into the paper
tray.
―
―Run [ColorCalibration]. page 10-27
―When making copies
Adjust the color balance.
page 6-19
―When printing from a computer
Adjust the color using the printer driver.
―
The color toner is empty. Do you want to continue printing in black
and white?
If the black toner is remained, the
machine continues printing in black and
white by selecting [Print in Black and
White] of [Color Toner Empty Action].
page 8-31
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
10-16
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Responding to Messages
If the message display or the computer displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.
A
C
NOTE
When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary.
To check the serial number, refer to the following:
Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page i)
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Access point was not
detected.
―Check if the access point has been
set correctly.
―
Account error. ―Failed to specify Job Accounting
when processing the job externally.
The job is canceled. Select the [OK]
key.
—
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Calibrating… — The machine is under the
adjustment to maintain its quality.
Please wait.
—
Cannot connect to
Authentication Server
Check the connection
with the server.
— Check the connection status with
the server.
—
Cannot connect to
Authentication Server
Check the domain name.
— Check the domain name. page 9-2
Cannot connect to
Authentication Server
Check the host name.
— Check the host name. page 9-2
Cannot connect to
Authentication Server
Set machine time to
match server's time.
— Set machine time to match the
server’s time.
page 2-17
Cannot connect to
Server. Check the
Connection Status.
Job is canceled.
— Check the connection status with
the server.
—
Cannot connect. — This appears when the Wi-Fi or Wi-
Fi Direct connection did not
complete. Check the settings, and
check the signal conditions.
—
10-17
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
E
F
Cannot duplex print on
this paper.
↑↓
(Displayed alternately)
Press OK to continue
using cassette #.
Did you select a paper size/type
that cannot be duplex printed?
Select [Paper] to select the
available paper. Select [OK] to print
without using Duplex function.
―
Cannot duplex print on
this paper.
↑↓
(Displayed alternately)
Press OK to using MP
Tray.
Did you select a paper size/type
that cannot be duplex printed?
Select [Paper] to select the
available paper. Select the [OK] key
to print without using Duplex
function.
―
Cannot recognize. ―
Make sure your ID card has been
registered.
Card
Authentication
Kit (B)
Operation
Guide
Cannot use this
function.
>> #####
―
This job is canceled because it is
restricted by User Authorization or
Job Accounting. Select the [
OK
] key.
―
Close # cover. Is there any cover which is open? Close the cover indicated on the
screen.
―
Are the toner containers installed
correctly? Is a toner container out of
place?
Make sure all 4 colors of toner
containers are installed correctly,
and close the right cover.
page 10-5
Close the document
processor and its cover.
Is the document processor open? Close the document processor. ―
Cooling…
Please wait.
―The machine is under the
adjustment to maintain its quality.
Please wait.
―
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Error occurred. Turn the
power switch off and on.
―System error has occurred. Turn the
power switch OFF and then ON.
―
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Failed to store job
retention data. Job is
canceled.
— The job is canceled. Select the [OK]
key.
—
FAX memory is full. — FAX cannot be performed any more
due to insufficient memory. The job
is canceled. Select the [OK] key.
FAX
Operation
Guide
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
10-18
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
H
I
J
K
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
High temperature.
Adjust room temp.
―Adjust the temperature and the
humidity of your room.
―
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Incorrect account ID.
Job is canceled.*1
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details
on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Err. Clear (page 8-27)
— The account ID was incorrect when
processing the job externally. The
job is canceled. Select the [OK] key.
—
Incorrect Login User
Name or Password. Job
is canceled.*1
— The login user name or password
was incorrect when processing the
job externally. The job is canceled.
Select the [OK] key.
—
Inner tray is full of paper.
Remove the paper.
—
Remove paper from the inner tray.
Select [
Continue
] to resume printing.
Select [
Cancel
] to cancel the job.
—
Insufficient memory.
Cannot start the job.
— Job cannot be started. Try again
later.
—
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Job Accounting
restriction exceeded.
Job is canceled.
Is the acceptable printing count
restricted by Job Accounting
exceeded?
The printing count exceeded the
acceptable count restricted by Job
Accounting. Cannot print any more.
This job is canceled. Select the
[OK] key.
―
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
KPDL error. Job is
canceled.*1
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details
on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Err. Clear (page 8-27)
―PostScript error has occurred. The
job is canceled. Select the [OK] key.
―
10-19
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
L
M
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Load paper in cassette #.
↑↓
(Displayed alternately)
Press OK to continue
using cassette #.
Is the indicated cassette out of
paper?
Load paper.
Select [Paper] to select the other
paper source. Select the [OK] key
to print on the paper in the currently
selected paper source.
page 3-2
Load paper in cassette #.
↑↓
(Displayed alternately)
Set selected size paper
and press [OK].
Is the indicated cassette out of
paper?
Load paper.
Select [Paper] to select the other
paper source. Select the [OK] key
to print on the paper in the currently
selected paper source.
page 3-2
Load paper in MP tray.
↑↓
(Displayed alternately)
Press OK to continue
using MP tray.
Is the paper of the selected size
loaded in the multipurpose tray?
Load paper.
Select [Paper] to select the other
paper source. Select the [OK] key
to print on the paper in the currently
selected paper source.
page 3-2
Load paper in MP tray.
↑↓
(Displayed alternately)
Set selected size paper
and press [OK].
Is the paper of the selected size
loaded in the multipurpose tray?
Load paper.
Select [Paper] to select the other
paper source. Select the [OK] key
to print on the paper in the currently
selected paper source.
page 3-2
Low temperature. Adjust
room temp.
―Adjust the temperature and the
humidity of your room.
―
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Machine failure. Call
service.
―An error has occurred in the
machine. Make a note of the error
code displayed on the message
display, and contact your service
representative.
―
Maximum number of
scanned pages. Job is
canceled.
Is the acceptable scanning count
exceeded?
Cannot scan pages any more. Job is
canceled. Select the [
OK
] key.
—
Memory card error.
Job is canceled.
—
An error has occurred on the
memory card. Job is canceled.
Select [
End
].
The error cord is as follows.
04: Insufficient space on the memory
card to complete this operation.
Move data or delete unneeded data.
—
10-20
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
N
P
Memory is full. Job is
canceled.
— The process cannot be performed
due to insufficient memory. If only
[End] is available, select [End]. The
job will be canceled.
—
Memory is full.
Print job cannot be
processed completely.*1
— Unable to continue the job as the
memory is used up. Select
[Continue] to print the scanned
pages. The print job cannot be
processed completely. Select
[Cancel] to cancel the job.
The machine may reproduce the
same originals by arranging the
following settings:
•Select [On] of RAM Disk Mode
in System Menu, and then
decrease the RAM Disk Size.
•Select [Printer Priority] of
Optional Memory in System
Menu.
NOTE
Before changing the RAM Disk
Mode or Optional Memory setting,
contact your administrator.
page 8-30
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details
on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Err. Clear (page 8-27)
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Non-genuine Toner.
Press [Help].
Is the installed toner container our
own brand?
The manufacturer assumes no
responsibility for damage caused by
a non-genuine toner. We
recommend that you only use
genuine toner containers. When
you want to use the toner container
currently installed, select the [OK]
key and the [Stop] key
simultaneously for 3 seconds or
more.
—
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Paper jammed at MP
tray.
―If a paper jam occurs, the machine
will stop and the location of the jam
will be indicated on the screen.
Leave the machine on and follow
the instruction to remove the
jammed paper.
page 10-32
Paper jammed in
Cassette #.
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
10-21
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
R
Paper jammed in
document processor.
―A paper jam has occurred in the
document processor. Leave the
machine on and select [Help] on the
screen, and follow the instruction to
remove the jammed paper.
page 10-42
Paper jammed in Rear
cover #.
―If a paper jam occurs, the machine
will stop and the location of the jam
will be indicated on the screen.
Leave the machine on and select
[Help] on the screen, and follow the
instruction to remove the jammed
paper.
page 10-39
Polling box limit
exceeded. Job is
canceled.
Is [OK] displayed on the screen? The specified box is full, and no
further storage is available; Job is
canceled. Select the [OK] key. Try
to perform the job again after
printing or deleting data from the
box.
FAX
Operation
Guide
Printing multiple copies
is not allowed.
— Only one copy is available. Select
[Continue] to continue printing.
Select [Cancel] to cancel the job.
—
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
RAM disk error. Press
[OK].
―An error has occurred on the RAM
disk. Job is canceled. Select the
[OK] key.
The possible error codes and their
descriptions are as follows.
The error cord is as follows.
04: Insufficient space on the RAM
disk. If the optional RAM dis is
installed, increase the RAM Disk
Size by changing RAM Disk Mode
in System Menu.
NOTE
The range of RAM disk size can be
increased by selecting [Printer
Priority] in Optional Memory.
page 8-30
Removable Memory is
full. Job is canceled.*1
―
Job is canceled. Select [
End
].
Insufficient free space in the
removable memory. Delete
unneeded files.
―
Remove original from
document processor.
Are there any originals left in the
document processor?
Remove originals from the
document processor.
page 10-42
Replace all originals and
press Start key.
―Remove originals from the
document processor, put them back
in their original order, and place
them again. Select [Cancel] to
cancel the job.
―
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
10-22
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
S
T
Replace the toner.
[C][M][Y]
Job is canceled.
B&W mode enabled.
―Replace the toner container to our
specified toner container. If not,
select [OK] to cancel the job. The
device prints in black and white for a
while.
page 10-5
Replace [C][M][Y][K]
toner.
―Replace the toner container to our
specified toner container.
page 10-5
Restricted by Job
Accounting.
Cannot print.
— This job is canceled because it is
restricted by Job Accounting. Select
the [OK] key.
—
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details
on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Err. Clear (page 8-27)
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Scanner memory is full.
Job is canceled.
— Scanning cannot be performed any
more due to insufficient memory.
The job is canceled. Select the [OK]
key.
page 8-30
Send Error.*1
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details
on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
Auto Err. Clear (page 8-27)
— An error has occurred during
transmission. The job is canceled.
Select the [OK] key.
Refer to Responding to Send Error
for the error code and corrective
actions.
page 10-24
Set the toner containers
properly and close Right
Cover.
Is the toner container installed
correctly?
Right cover is open or toner
containers are not properly
installed. Open right cover. Set all
four toner containers properly.
Close right cover.
page 10-5
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
The device cannot be
connected because
allowed connections
would be exceeded.
— Release the connection of an
unused mobile device, or set an
auto break time on the machine to
break connections to mobile
devices.
—
The phone receiver is off
the hook. Hang Up.
— Put down the receiver. FAX
Operation
Guide
The slit glass requires
cleaning.
— Clean the slit glass. page 10-3
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
10-23
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
U
This user account is
locked out.
Contact administrator
Job is canceled.
— Contact administrator.
The job is canceled. Select the [OK]
key.
—
Toner is low.
(Replace when empty.)
— It is almost time to replace the toner
container. Obtain a new toner
container.
—
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Unknown Toner
Installed. PC
Does the installed toner container's
regional specification match the
machine's?
Install the specified toner container. —
USB memory error.
Job is canceled.
Is writing to a removable memory
prohibited?
An error occurred in the removable
memory. The job stopped. Select
the [OK] key.
The error cord is as follows.
01: Connect a removable memory
that can be written to.
—
— An error occurred in the removable
memory. The job stopped. Select
[OK].
The error cord is as follows.
01: The amount of data that can be
saved at once has been exceeded.
Turn the power OFF/ON. If the error
still occurs, the removable memory
is not compatible with the machine.
Use the removable memory
formatted by this machine. If the
removable memory cannot be
formatted, it is damaged. Connect a
compatible removable memory.
—
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
10-24
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Responding to Send Error
Error
Code Message Corrective Actions Reference
Page
1101 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the host name of the SMTP server on the
Command Center RX.
page 2-51
Failed to send via FTP. Check the host name of FTP. page 5-18
Failed to send via SMB. Check the host name of SMB. page 5-16
1102 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings.
• Login user name and login password
NOTE
If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain
name.
•Host name
•Path
page 5-16
Failed to send the e-mail. Check the following on the Command Center RX.
• SMTP login user name and login password
• POP3 login user name and login password
• E-mail size limit
page 2-51
Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings.
• Login user name and login password
NOTE
If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain
name.
•Path
• Folder share permissions of the recipient
page 5-18
1103 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings.
• Login user name and login password
NOTE
If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain
name.
•Path
• Folder share permissions of the recipient
page 5-16
Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings.
•Path
• Folder share permissions of the recipient
page 5-18
1104 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail address.
NOTE
If the address is rejected by the domain, you cannot
send the email.
page 5-15
10-25
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1105 Failed to send via SMB. Select [On] of the SMB settings on the Command
Center RX.
page 8-13
Failed to send the e-mail. Select [On] of the SMTP settings on the Command
Center RX.
page 2-51
Failed to send via FTP. Select [On] of the FTP settings on the Command
Center RX.
page 8-12
1106 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the sender address of SMTP on the Command
Center RX.
page 2-51
1131 Failed to send via FTP. Select [On] of the secure protocol settings on the
Command Center RX.
page 8-16
1132 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the following of the SMTP server.
• Is SMTP over SSL available?
• Is the encryption available?
Refer to the
Command
Center RX
User Guide.
Failed to send via FTP. Check the following of the FTP server.
• Is FTPS available?
• Is the encryption available?
—
2101 Failed to send via SMB. Check the network and SMB settings.
• The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• The server is not operating properly.
• Host name and IP address
• Port number
—
Failed to send via FTP. Check the network and FTP settings.
• The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• The server is not operating properly.
• Host name and IP address
• Port number
—
Failed to send the e-mail. Check the network and Command Center RX.
• The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• The server is not operating properly.
• POP3 server name of the POP3 user
• SMTP server name
page 2-51
Error
Code Message Corrective Actions Reference
Page
10-26
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2102
2103
Failed to send via FTP. Check the network.
• The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• The server is not operating properly.
—
Check the following of the FTP server.
• Is FTP available?
• The server is not operating properly.
—
Failed to send the e-mail. Check the network.
• The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• The server is not operating properly.
—
2201
2202
2203
2231
Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send via FTP.
Failed to send via SMB.
Check the network.
• The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• The server is not operating properly.
—
2204 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail size limit of the SMTP settings on
the Command Center RX.
page 2-51
3101 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the authentication methods of both the sender
and the recipient.
—
Failed to send via FTP. Check the network.
• The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• The server is not operating properly.
—
3201 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the SMTP user authentication method of the
recipient.
—
0007
4201
4701
5101
5102
5103
5104
7101
7102
7103
720f
— Turn the power switch off and back on. If this error
occurs several times, make a note of the displayed
error code and contact your service representative.
page 2-10
9181 — The scanned original exceeds the acceptable number
of pages of 999. Send the excess pages separately.
—
Error
Code Message Corrective Actions Reference
Page
10-27
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjustment/Maintenance
Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance
If there is an image problem and the message to run adjustment or maintenance menu appears, run Adjustment/
Maintenance in the system menu.
The table below lists the item you can Procedure.
ColorCalibration
This machine contains a calibration function that automatically makes adjustments to compensate for changes that
occur over time due to variations in the ambient temperature and humidity. So that the highest quality color printing can
be maintained, this color calibration operation is carried out automatically each time the power to the machine is turned
on. If color tone does not improve or color drift does not improve after executing this color adjustment, perform color print
position correction on the following:
Color Regist. (page 10-28)
1Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Adjust/Maint.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >
[ColorCalibration] > [OK] key
2Perform the Color Calibration.
Select [Yes] to execute Color Calibration.
"Completed." is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.
Item Description Reference Page
ColorCalibration Adjust color drift or hue of printed image in the most appropriate color. page 10-27
Color Regist. Correct the color position to resolve color drift. page 10-28
10-28
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Color Regist.
Auto registration and manual registration are available for Color Registration. Color drift can be largely corrected through
auto registration. However, if it is not resolved or to perform more detailed settings, use the manual registration.
Auto Correction
1Load paper.
2Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Adjust/Maint.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >
[Color Regist.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Auto] > [OK] key
3Print the chart.
Select [Yes].
IMPORTANT
Before performing color registration, be sure to perform ColorCalibration. If color drift remains, perform color
registration. By performing color registration without performing ColorCalibration, the color drift will be
resolved once, however, it may cause the serious color drift later.
ColorCalibration (page 10-27)
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in
the multipurpose tray.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is
curled or folded may cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration
above).
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width
guide, the paper may skew or become jammed.
10-29
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Chart Example
4Perform the color registration.
1As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the platen with the edge with
the arrows toward the back.
2Select [OK] to scan the chart.
When scanning is finished, color printing position correction starts.
10-30
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Manual Correction
1Load paper.
2Display the screen.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Adjust/Maint.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >
[Color Regist.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Manual] > [OK] key
3Print the chart.
[▲] [▼] key > [Print Chart] > [OK] key > [Yes]
A chart is printed. On the chart, for each of M (magenta), C (cyan) and Y (yellow), charts for H-
1 to 5 and V-1 to 5 are printed.
After printing, you will return to the advanced menu for color printing position correction.
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the
multipurpose tray.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled
or folded may cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration
above).
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide,
the paper may skew or become jammed.
10-31
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Chart Example
4Display the correction menu.
[▲] [▼] key > [Adjust Magenta] > [OK] key
The magenta correction menu appears.
5Enter the appropriate value.
1Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely match. If this is the 0 position,
registration for that color is not required. For the illustration, B is the appropriate value.
From charts H-1 to H-5, read the values from H-1 to H-5.
From charts V-1 to V-5, read only the values from V-3 (center).
2Select the [◄] or [►] key to change the H-1 to H-5 and V-3 items, select the [▲] or [▼] key
to enter the values read from the chart, and select the [OK] key.
Magenta correction is performed. After a brief interval, you will return to the advanced menu for color
printing position correction.
To increase the value from 0 up to a maximum of 9, select the [▲] key. To decrease the value, select
the [▼] key.
Select [▼] to change the value from 0 to an alphabetical letter. Continue selecting to change from A
through l. To move in the opposite direction, select [▲].
You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these values.
3Perform cyan and yellow correction as explained in steps 4 and 5.
10-32
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Clearing Paper Jams
If a paper jam occurs, the message display will display "Paper Jam." and the machine will stop. Refer to these
procedures to remove the jammed paper.
Jam Location Indicators
If a paper jam occurs, the location of the jam will be displayed on the message display as well as the clearing instructions.
After you remove the jam, the machine will warm up again and the error message will be cleared. The machine resumes
with the page that was printing when the jam occurred.
1 Shows the location of a paper jam.
2 Displays the Help screen.
NOTE
For details on Help Screen, refer to the following:
Help Screen (page 2-14)
Paper Jam Location Indicator
Paper Jam Location Reference Page
ACassette 1 page 10-33
BCassette 2 page 10-34
CMultipurpose Tray page 10-36
DDocument Processor page 10-42
EDuplex Unit page 10-39
FRear Cover 1 page 10-39
Paper
jammed in
Cassette 1.
Help
JAM****
1
2
Paper
jammed in
Cassette 1.
Help
JAM****
A
C
F
E
D
B
10-33
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1
1Pull Cassette 1 out toward you until it stops.
2Remove any jammed paper.
3Push Cassette 1 back in.
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
10-34
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 2
1Open Rear Cover 2.
2Remove any jammed paper.
3Push Rear Cover 2.
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
10-35
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
4Pull Cassette 2 out toward you until it stops.
5Remove any jammed paper.
6Push Cassette 2 back in.
10-36
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray
1Remove any jammed paper.
2Remove all the paper.
3Push the multipurpose tray.
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
10-37
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
4Pull Cassette 1 out toward you until it stops.
5Open Feed Cover.
6Remove any jammed paper.
7Push Feed Cover back in.
10-38
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
8Push Cassette 1 back in.
9Open the multipurpose tray.
10 Reload the paper.
10-39
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper in Rear Cover 1
1Open Rear Cover 1.
2Remove any jammed paper.
3Open the cover (A).
CAUTION
The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of getting
burned.
A
10-40
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
4Remove any jammed paper.
5Open the feed cover (B).
6Remove any jammed paper.
7Open the duplex unit (C).
B
C
10-41
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
8Remove any jammed paper.
9Push Rear Cover 1.
10-42
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper in the Document
Processor
1Remove the originals from the Original Table.
2Open the front cover and remove any jammed paper.
3Remove originals inside the document processor.
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
10-43
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
4Push the cover.
11-1
11 Appendix
This chapter explains the following topics:
Optional Equipment .......................................................................................................................................... 11-2
Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................................................ 11-2
Optional Applications .............................................................................................................................. 11-6
Starting Application Use .......................................................................................................................... 11-6
Checking Details of Application .............................................................................................................. 11-7
Character Entry Method .................................................................................................................................... 11-8
Using the Keys ........................................................................................................................................ 11-8
Selecting Type of Characters .................................................................................................................. 11-9
Characters That Can be Entered Using the Numeric Keys .................................................................... 11-9
Entering Symbols .................................................................................................................................. 11-10
Entering Characters .............................................................................................................................. 11-10
Entering Using the Character Selection Screen ................................................................................... 11-12
Paper .............................................................................................................................................................. 11-13
Basic Paper Specifications ................................................................................................................... 11-13
Choosing the Appropriate Paper .......................................................................................................... 11-14
Special Paper ........................................................................................................................................ 11-17
Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 11-21
Machine ................................................................................................................................................ 11-21
Copy Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 11-22
Printer Functions ................................................................................................................................... 11-23
Scanner Functions ................................................................................................................................ 11-23
Document Processor ............................................................................................................................ 11-24
Paper Feeder ........................................................................................................................................ 11-24
Glossary .......................................................................................................................................................... 11-25
11-2
Appendix > Optional Equipment
Optional Equipment
Overview of Optional Equipment
The following optional equipment is available for the machine.
(1) Expansion Memory
Software option
(4) UG-33
(5) SD/SDHC Memory Card
(6) USB Keyboard
(3) Card Authentication
Kit (B)
(2) PF-5110
11-3
Appendix > Optional Equipment
(1) "Expansion Memory"
The machine can perform the more multiple jobs simultaneously by adding more memories. You can increase the
machine's memory up to 1,536 MB by plugging in the optional memory modules.
Precautions for Handling the Memory Modules
To protect electronic parts, discharge static electricity from your body by wearing an antistatic wrist strap, if possible,
when you install the memory modules. If you do not have a wristband, touch a metal object to discharge static electricity
before inserting the memory.
Installing the Memory Modules
1Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cable.
2Remove the covers.
3Remove the memory module from its package.
4With the memory connection terminal pointing toward the socket, align the cut-out part with
the socket terminal and insert directly in at an angle.
5Carefully press the inserted memory down and into the machine.
6Reinstall the covers.
11-4
Appendix > Optional Equipment
(2) PF-5110 "Paper Feeder"
The paper feeder can be installed in the printer.
Loading in the Cassette 2 (page 3-7)
(3) Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit"
User login administration can be performed using ID cards. To do so, it is necessary to register ID card information on
the previously registered local user list. For more information about how to register this information, refer to the
following:
Card Authentication Kit(B) Operation Guide
(4) UG-33 "ThinPrint Option"
This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.
(5) "SD/SDHC Memory Card"
An SD/SDHC memory card is useful for storing fonts, macros, and overlays. The machine is equipped with a slot for an
SDHC memory card with a maximum size of 32 GB, and an SD memory card with a maximum size of 2 GB.
Reading the SD/SDHC Memory Card
Once inserted in the machine's slot, the contents of the SD/SDHC memory card can be read from the operation panel or
automatically when you power on or reset the machine.
Installing and Formatting the SD/SDHC Memory Card
To use an unused SD/SDHC memory card, you must first use the machine to format the SD/SDHC memory card.
Format SD Card (page 8-30)
1Power off the machine and unplug the power cord.
2Remove the cover.
IMPORTANT
Unencrypted data is saved on the SD/SDHC memory card.
Exercise caution when saving sensitive documents.
11-5
Appendix > Optional Equipment
3Insert the SD/SDHC memory card into the SD/SDHC memory card slot.
4Replace the covers.
(6) USB Keyboard "USB Keyboard"
A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel. A special mount is also
available to install the keyboard on the machine. Please contact your dealer or service representative for information on
keyboards that are compatible with your machine before you purchase one.
11-6
Appendix > Optional Equipment
Optional Applications
The applications listed below are installed on this machine.
Starting Application Use
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key
2[▲] [▼] key > [Op Functions] > [OK] key
2Activate the application.
1Select the desired application, and select the [OK] key.
2[▲] [▼] key > [Official] > [OK] key
To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without entering the license key.
3Enter the license key > [OK] key
Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not
appear, go to Step 6.
4Select [Yes].
Application
Card Authentication Kit
ThinPrint Option*1
*1 This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.
NOTE
• Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the
application.
• If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [
Login
]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
NOTE
You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [Menu] >
[▲][▼] key > [Detail] > [OK] key.
NOTE
If you started the Thin Print option and entered the license key, turn the power OFF/ON.
11-7
Appendix > Optional Equipment
Checking Details of Application
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key
2[▲] [▼] key > [Op Functions] > [OK] key
2Check the details of application.
1Select the desired application, and select [Menu].
2[▲] [▼] key > [Detail] > [OK] key
You can view detailed information on the selected application. Select the [►] key to view the next
screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen.
The table below lists the item you can view.
Extend the trial period.
[◄] [►] key > [Date of Trial] > [Extend] > [Yes]
The trial period is extended.
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [
Login
]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
Item
Function Name
License On
Trial Counts
Date of Trial
Status
11-8
Appendix > Character Entry Method
Character Entry Method
This section explains how to enter characters.
Using the Keys
Use the following keys to enter characters.
No. Display/Key Description
1Message Display Displays entered characters.
2Cursor Characters are entered at the position of the cursor.
3Right Select key Select to select the type of characters you want to enter. (When [Text] is displayed)
4[OK] key Select to finalize entry and return to the screen before the entry. To enter a symbol, select to confirm
the selected symbol.
5[Clear] key Select to delete characters.
6Numeric keys Select to enter characters and symbols.
7Arrow keys Select to select the entry position, or select a character from the character list.
Account Name:
Text
ABC
516
2
7
43
11-9
Appendix > Character Entry Method
Selecting Type of Characters
To enter characters, the following three types are available:
In a character entry screen, select [Text] to select the type of characters you want to enter.
Each time you select [Text], the character type switches as follows: [ABC], [123], [Symbols], [ABC] ...
Characters That Can be Entered Using the Numeric
Keys
The following table lists the characters that can be entered using the numeric keys.
Types Description
ABC To enter alphabets.
123 To enter numerals.
Symbols To enter symbols.
Keys Characters (Each press of a key changes the character in the order from left to right.)
. @ - _ / : ~ 1 (Repeats from the first character on the left)
1 (During number entry)
a b c A B C 2 (Repeats from the first character on the left)
2 (During number entry)
d e f D E F 3 (Repeats from the first character on the left)
3 (During number entry)
g h i G H I 4 (Repeats from the first character on the left)
4 (During number entry)
j k l J K L 5 (Repeats from the first character on the left)
5 (During number entry)
m n o M N O 6 (Repeats from the first character on the left)
6 (During number entry)
p q r s P Q R S 7 (Repeats from the first character on the left)
7 (During number entry)
t u v T U V 8 (Repeats from the first character on the left)
8 (During number entry)
Symbols:
Text
!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>
?@[\]^_`{|}~^
<>¡¢£¤¥¦§¨©ª
Account Name:
Text
123
Account Name:
Text
ABC
11-10
Appendix > Character Entry Method
Entering Symbols
Symbols can be entered.
1Select the [#] key. Displays the symbol list.
2Select the [▲], [▼], [►] or [◄] key to move the cursor and select the symbol to be entered.
3Select the [OK] key. The selected symbol is entered.
Entering Characters
Follow the steps shown below to enter "R&D" for example.
1Select the [7] key three times. [r] is entered.
w x y z W X Y Z 9 (Repeats from the first character on the left)
9 (During number entry)
. , - _ ' ! ? (space) 0 (Repeats from the first character on the left)
0 (During number entry)
Select to change the character in the cursor position between upper case and lower case.
"*" or "." (During number entry)
! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; Displays the
symbol list. For
details, refer to the
following:
Entering
Symbols (page
11-10)
<=>?@[ \ ] ^_ ` { | }~
# (During number entry)
* Depending on the functions, there are symbols that cannot be entered.
Keys Characters (Each press of a key changes the character in the order from left to right.)
Symbols:
Text
!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>
?@[\]^_`{|}~^
<>¡¢£¤¥¦§¨©ª
Symbols:
Text
!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>
?@[\]^_`{|}~^
<>¡¢£¤¥¦§¨©ª
Account Name:
Text
ABC
R&
Account Name:
Text
ABC
r
11-11
Appendix > Character Entry Method
2Select the [*/.] key. [r] changes to [R].
3Select the [►] key. The cursor moves to the right.
4Select the [#] key. Displays the symbol list.
5Select the [▲] or [▼] key to move the cursor and select [&].
6Select the [OK] key. [&] is entered.
7Select the [3] key four times. [D] is entered.
8Select the [►] key.
Account Name:
Text
ABC
R
Account Name:
Text
ABC
R
Symbols:
Text
!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>
?@[\]^_`{|}~^
<>¡¢£¤¥¦§¨©ª
Symbols:
Text
!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>
?@[\]^_`{|}~^
<>¡¢£¤¥¦§¨©ª
Account Name:
Text
ABC
R&
Account Name:
Text
ABC
R&D
Account Name:
Text
ABC
R&D
11-12
Appendix > Character Entry Method
Entering Using the Character Selection Screen
If "Login Operation" is [Select Character], then the screen is displayed to enter details by selecting from the characters
on the message display. For details on changing the login operation method, refer to the following:
Function Defaults (page 8-28)
1Select the [▲], [▼], [►] or [◄] key to move the cursor and select the character to be
entered.
2Select the [OK] key. The selected character is entered.
You can go back one character by selecting the [Clear] key.
3When the entry is complete, select [Complete].
Login User Name:
Complete
abcdefghijklmnopqrst
uvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
Login User Name:
Complete
abcdefghijklmnopqrst
uvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
A
Login User Name:
Complete
uvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
Admin
abcdefghijklmnopqrst
11-13
Appendix > Paper
Paper
This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.
For details on the sizes, types, and number of sheets of paper that can be loaded in each paper tray, refer to the
following:
Specifications (page 11-21)
Basic Paper Specifications
This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers such as
laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix.
Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.
Supported Paper
Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper.
Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.
Basic Paper Specifications that can be Used with This Machine
The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent sections
for further details.
We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications.
Criteria Specifications
Weight Cassettes: 60 to 163 g/m2
Multipurpose tray: 60 to 220 g/m2, 230 g/m2 (Cardstock)
Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm
Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°
Moisture content 4 to 6%
Pulp content 80% or more
NOTE
Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications
shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend purchasing a small amount of
recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and
contains low levels of paper dust.
11-14
Appendix > Paper
Choosing the Appropriate Paper
This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.
Condition
Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper
fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may
also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even surface; however,
avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit.
Ingredients
Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon. Those
types of paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.
Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper content
consists of cotton or other fibers.
Smoothness
The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several
sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.
Basis Weight
In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in
area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut to the standard
size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause
paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight (i.e., thickness) may cause several
sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to
adhere correctly.
Moisture Content
Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the paper is
supplied, the electrostatic chargeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.
Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes paper to
become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture,
making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.
Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6%.
To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.
• Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.
• Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to be used for
a while.
• Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor.
Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors.
• Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.
• Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.
11-15
Appendix > Paper
Other Paper Specifications
Porosity: The density of the paper fibers.
Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.
Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls
upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray.
Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper that can be
discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together.
Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.
Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are rough,
sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially careful when you
cut the paper yourself.
Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should have
been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture.
Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to the
basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test.
• Glossy paper
• Watermarked paper
• Paper with an uneven surface
• Perforated paper
11-16
Appendix > Paper
Paper Sizes that can be Used with This Machine
Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine.
Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner angles must
be 90° ± 0.2°.
Multipurpose Tray
• Hagaki (Cardstock) (100 × 148 mm)
• Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (148 × 200 mm)
• Envelope Monarch (3-7/8 × 7-1/2")
• Envelope #10 (4-1/8 × 9-1/2")
• Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm)
• Envelope C5 (162 × 229 mm)
• Envelope #9 (3-7/8 × 8-7/8")
• Envelope #6 3/4 (3-5/8 × 6-1/2")
• Statement
• Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm)
• Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm)
• Custom (70 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm)
Cassettes or Multipurpose Tray
• Executive (7-1/4 × 10-1/2")
•Letter
• Legal
• A4 (297 × 210 mm)
• B5 (257 × 182 mm)
• A5-R (148 × 210 mm)
• A5 (210 × 148 mm)
• A6 (148 × 105 mm)
• B6 (182 × 128 mm)
• B5(ISO) (176 × 250 mm)
• Oficio II
• 216 × 340 mm
• 16K (273 × 197 mm)
• Statement-R
• Folio (210 × 330 mm)
• Custom (Cassette: 105 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm, Multipurpose Tray: 70 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm)
11-17
Appendix > Paper
Special Paper
This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.
Special Paper that can be Used with This Machine
• Transparencies
• Preprinted paper
• Bond paper
• Recycled paper
• Thin paper
• Letterhead
• Colored paper
• Prepunched paper
• Envelopes
• Hagaki (Cardstock)
• Thick paper
• Labels
•Coated
• High-quality paper
When using these paper and media, choose those that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as
laser printers). Use the multipurpose tray for transparencies, thin paper, envelopes, cardstocks, label paper and coated.
Choosing Special Paper
Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will vary
considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more likely than
regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the
print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below. Note that we are not
responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper.
Select a cassette or multipurpose tray for special paper.
Transparencies
Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following conditions.
To avoid problems, use the multipurpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the
machine.
If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.
Heat resistance Must withstand at least 190°C
Thickness 0.100 to 0.110 mm
Material Polyester
Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm
Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°
11-18
Appendix > Paper
Label
Be sure to feed labels from the multipurpose tray.
For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine
and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled
labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.
When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.
Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected
by the force applied in the machine. The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used. This composition of
labels may cause more problems.
The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels,
resulting in a serious failure.
Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the
carrier sheet before completing output.
Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.
Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g/m²
Basis weight
(overall paper weight)
104 to 151 g/m²
Top sheet thickness 0.086 to 0.107 mm
Overall paper thickness 0.115 to 0.145 mm
Moisture content 4 to 6 % (composite)
Top sheet
Adhesive layer
Carrier sheet
Not allowedAllowed
Top sheet
Carrier sheet
11-19
Appendix > Paper
Hagaki (Cardstock)
Before loading Hagaki (Cardstock) into the multipurpose tray, fan them and align the edges. If the Hagaki (Cardstock)
paper is curled, straighten it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki (Cardstock) may cause jams.
Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (available at post offices). Some Hagaki (Cardstock) may still have rough
edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki (Cardstock)
on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler.
Envelopes
Envelopes should be fed from the multipurpose tray.
Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin
envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing
envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality.
Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until you are
ready to use them.
Keep the following points in mind.
• Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is
exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes
off in the machine.
• Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a
string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window.
• If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.
Thick Paper
Before loading thick paper, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a
paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki (Cardstock) by placing the paper on a
flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams.
Colored Paper
Colored paper must conform to the specifications.
Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-13)
In addition, the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).
NOTE
If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper with the leading edge raised a few
millimeters.
Burrs
Burrs
11-20
Appendix > Paper
Preprinted Paper
Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications.
Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-13)
The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use
paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars.
Recycled Paper
Recycled paper must conform to the specifications; however, its whiteness may be considered separately.
Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-13)
Coated Paper
Coated paper is created by treating the surface of the base paper with a coating that provides higher printing quality than
plain paper. Coated paper is used for particularly high quality printing.
The surface of high-quality or medium-quality paper is coated with special agents that improve ink adhesion by making
the paper surface smoother. These agents are used either to coat both sides of the paper or just one side. The coated
side appears slightly glossy.
NOTE
Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure satisfactory print quality.
IMPORTANT
When printing on coated paper in very humid environments, ensure that the paper is kept dry as moisture
may cause sheets to stick together when they are fed into the machine. If printing in very humid
environments, set coated paper for one sheet each.
11-21
Appendix > Specifications
Specifications
Machine
IMPORTANT
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
NOTE
For more information on using the FAX, refer to the following:
FAX Operation Guide
Item Description
Type Desktop
Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser
Paper Weight Cassette 60 to 163 g/m2
Multipurpose
Tray
60 to 220 g/m2, 230 g/m2 (Cardstock)
Paper Type Cassette
Plain, Rough, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched,
Letterhead, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
(Duplex: Same as
Simplex)
Multipurpose
Tray
Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Labels, Recycled, Vellum,
Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Coated, Color, Prepunched,
Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Paper Size Cassette A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,
Executive,Oficio II, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, 16K, B5(ISO),
Custom (105 × 148 mm to 216 × 356 mm)
Multipurpose
Tray
A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal,
Statement-R, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5(ISO),
Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch,
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock),
Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2,
Custom (70 × 148 mm to 216 × 356 mm)
Printable area Print margin for top, bottom and both sides is 4.2 mm.
Warm-up Time
23°C/73.4°F, 60 %
Power on 32 seconds or less
Sleep 12 seconds or less
Paper Capacity Cassette 250 sheets (80 g/m2)*1
*1 Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.
Multipurpose
Tray
50 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller) (80 g/m2)
Output Tray
Capacity
Inner tray 150 sheets (80 g/m2)
Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography
Memory 512 MB
Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
USB Port: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)
Wireless LAN support*2
Fax: 1
*2 Only ECOSYS M5521cdw
11-22
Appendix > Specifications
Copy Functions
Item Description
Operating
Environment
Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F
Humidity 10 to 80 %
Altitude 3,500 m/11,482 ft maximum
Brightness 1,500 lux maximum
Dimension (W × D × H)
(Including the Document
Processor)
16.42" × 16.89" × 19.49"
417 × 429 × 495 mm
Weight
(without toner container)
Approx. 57.33 lb/Approx. 26 kg
Space Required (W × D)
(Using multipurpose tray)
16.42" × 24.14"
417 × 613 mm
Power Source 120 V Specification Model: 120 V 60 Hz 8.6 A
230 V Specification Model: 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz 4.5 A
The power consumption of the
product in networked standby (If
all network ports are connected.)
2.2W
Options Optional Equipment (page 11-2)
Item Description
Copy Speed Black and White Copying Full Color Copying
A4/A5 21 sheets/min 21 sheets/min
Letter 22 sheets/min 22 sheets/min
Legal 18 sheets/min 18 sheets/min
B5 22 sheets/min 22 sheets/min
A5-R 22 sheets/min 22 sheets/min
A6 22 sheets/min 22 sheets/min
16K 22 sheets/min 22 sheets/min
First Copy Time
(A4, place on
the platen, feed
from Cassette)
Black and
White
10 seconds or less
Color 12 seconds or less
Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments
Auto mode: Preset Zoom
Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets
Resolution 600 × 600 dpi, 9600 dpi equivalent × 600 dpi
Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: Legal/
Folio)
Original Feed System Fixed
11-23
Appendix > Specifications
Printer Functions
Scanner Functions
Item Description
Printing Speed Same as Copying Speed.
First Print Time
(A4, feed from
Cassette)
Black and
White
11.0 seconds or less
Color 12.5 seconds or less
Resolution 9600 dpi equivalent × 600 dpi,
1200 dpi × 1200 dpi (Data resolution is 600 dpi.)*1
*1 The processing speed will be slower than normal.
Operating System
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7,
Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008/R2,
Windows Server 2012/R2, Mac OS 10.5 or later
Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Wireless LAN support*2
*2 Only ECOSYS M5521cdw
Page Description Language PRESCRIBE
Emulations PCL6 (PCL-XL, PCL5c), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible), PDF,
XPS, OpenXPS
Item Description
Resolution 300 × 300 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi, 200 × 100 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi,
400 × 400 dpi, 200 × 400 dpi
File Format TIFF (MMR/JPEG compression), JPEG, PDF (MMR/JPEG
compression), XPS, High compressive PDF, Encrypted PDF, OPEN
XPS, PDF/A-1
Scanning Speed*1
*1 When using the document processor (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)
1-sided B/W 30 Images/min
Color 12 Images/min
(A4 landscape, 300 × 600 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original)
Interface Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T), USB,
Wireless LAN support*2
*2 Only ECOSYS M5521cdw
Transmission System SMBv3, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, USB, TWAIN*3, WIA*4, WSD
*3 Available Operating System: Windows XP/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2003/Windows Server 2008/
Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Windows Server 2012/
Windows Server 2012 R2
*4 Available Operating System: Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/
Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows 10
11-24
Appendix > Specifications
Document Processor
Paper Feeder
Item Description
Supported Original Types Sheet originals
Paper Size Maximum: Legal/A4
Minimum: Statement/A6
Paper Weight 50 to 160 g/m2
Loading Capacity 50 sheets (50 to 80 g/m²) maximum*1
*1 Up to upper limit height line in the document processor
Item Description
Paper Supply Method Friction retard feeder
( No. Sheets: 250, 80 g/m2, 1 cassette)
Paper Size
A4, A5-R, A5, B5, A6, B6, Letter, Legal, Folio, 216 × 340 mm,
Statement-R, Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5(ISO),
Custom (105 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm)
Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 to 163 g/m²
Media types: Plain, Recycled, Special Paper
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
16.15" × 17.62" × 5.79"
410 × 447.5 × 147 mm
Weight Approx. 8.16 lb/Approx. 3.6 kg
NOTE
Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.
11-25
Appendix > Glossary
Glossary
Accessibility
The machine is designed featuring good accessibility even for the elderly and those who are physically challenged or
visually impaired.
Apple Talk
AppleTalk offers file sharing and printer sharing and it also enables you to utilize application software that is on another
computer on the same AppleTalk network.
Auto Form Feed Timeout
During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the auto form
feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints output. However, no output is
performed if the last page has no data to be printed.
Auto-IP
Auto-IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup. However, DHCP
requires a DHCP server. Auto-IP is a server-less method of choosing an IP address. IP addresses between 169.254.0.0
to 169.254.255.255 are reserved for Auto-IP and assigned automatically.
Auto Paper Selection
A function to automatically select paper in the same size as originals when printing.
Auto Sleep
A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or there is no data transfer for a
specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum.
Bonjour
Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers, devices and
services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows devices to automatically
recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set. Bonjour also sends and receives
network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that
Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run
stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets
are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly
for Bonjour.
Default Gateway
This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing
computers outside the network that you are on. When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address,
data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway
addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client
computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned.
11-26
Appendix > Glossary
DHCP (IPv6)
DHCP (IPv6) is the next-generation of the Internet's Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6. It extends
the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the
network. DHCP (IPv6) permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an
IPv6 node. Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically, the IPv6 node management
workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation.
dpi (dots per inch)
A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm).
EcoPrint Mode
A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal.
Emulation
The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates operation of
PCL6, KPDL3 (PostScript 3 compatible).
Enhanced WSD
Proprietary web services.
FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and SMTP/POP,
FTP is now frequently used on the Internet.
Grayscale
A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying from black
at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels:
that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits; and 65,536 gray levels for 16
bits.
Help
A [Help] key is provided on this machine's operation panel. If you are unsure of how to operate the machine, would like
more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly, press the [Help] key to
view a detailed explanation on the message display.
IP Address
An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network.
The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each number should be
between 0 and 255.
IPP
IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be
sent between remote computers and printers. IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and
enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the HTTP authentication
mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.
11-27
Appendix > Glossary
Job Box
The Job Box function stores print data on the printer and allows users to print single or multiple copies of the stored data
later using the printer's operation panel.
KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language)
Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3.
Multipurpose (MP) Tray
The paper supply tray on the front side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto
envelopes, Hagaki (Cardstock), transparencies, or labels.
NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)
An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on smaller
networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities
to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and Microsoft for its Windows as
a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.
Outline font
With outline fonts, character outlines are represented with numerical expressions and fonts can be enlarged or reduced
in different ways by changing the numeric values of those expressions. Printing remains clear even if you enlarge fonts,
since the characters are defined with outlines represented with numerical expressions. You can specify the font size in
steps of 0.25 points up to 999.75 points.
PDF/A
This is "ISO 19005-1. Document management - Electronic document file format for long-term preservation - Part 1: Use
of PDF (PDF/A)", and is a file format based on PDF 1.4. It has been standardized as ISO 19005-1, and is a
specialization of PDF, which has been mainly used for printing, for long-term storage. A new part, ISO 19005-2 (PDF/A-
2), is currently being prepared.
POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)
A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet.
PostScript
A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly-functional
graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985, followed by Level 2 that
enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level 3 was released as an update for
the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies.
PPM (prints per minute)
This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.
Printer Driver
The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine is
contained in the DVD enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine.
RA(Stateless)
The IPv6 router communicates (transmits) information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6. This information
is the Router Advertisement (RA).
11-28
Appendix > Glossary
ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol, and is a IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 "Internet Control
Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Specification".
RAM Disk
Using part of the printer's memory as a virtual disk, you can set any amount of memory from overall printer memory as a
RAM disk in order to use features such as electronic sorting (shortening print time).
Send as E-mail
A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be selected
from the list or entered at each time.
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as
well as for sending mail from clients to their servers.
Status Page
The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper source
settings.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address.
A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in
the prefix indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and,
in this context, indicates the first section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the network
address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address "133.210.2.0/24". In
this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix (network section). This new network
address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet
address. When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the "DHCP" setting to "Off".
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)
TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other
over a network.
TCP/IP (IPv6)
TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and
expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4, while also
introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission.
TWAIN (Technology Without An Interesting Name)
A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to computers. The
TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software. TWAIN is adopted
on a large amount of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software.
USB (Universal Serial Bus) 2.0
A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is equipped with
USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer.
11-29
Appendix > Glossary
WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition)
A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices. This
function replaces what TWAIN used to do. The feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of
operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application.
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
WPS is a network security standard created by Wi-Fi Alliance, to make it easy to connect with the wireless devices and
set up the Wi-Fi Protected Access. The WPS-supported services can connect to the wireless access points by pushing
a button or entering passphrases.
Index-1
Index
A
Accessibility 11-25
Address Book 3-20
Adding 3-20
Contact 3-20
Editing and Deleting 3-25
Group 3-23
Adjustment/Maintenance 8-38
AirPrint 4-9
Anti-theft Lock Slot 2-3
Apache License (Version 2.0) 1-14
Apple Talk 11-25
Auto Error Clear 8-27
Auto Form Feed Timeout 11-25
Auto Panel Reset 8-26
Auto Paper Selection 11-25
Auto Sleep 2-27, 11-25
Auto-IP 11-25
Settings 8-10
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function 1-17
B
Background Density Adjustment 6-21
Default 8-28
Bonjour 11-25
Settings 8-12
Border Line 6-13
Default 8-29
Button (Right Cover Open) 2-2
C
Cables 2-7
Card Authentication Kit 11-4
Cassette
Loading Paper 3-4, 3-7
Paper Size and Media Type 8-23
Cassette 1 2-2
Cassette 2 2-6
Character Entry Method 11-8
Checking the Counter 2-43
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner 7-15
Cleaning 10-2
Glass Platen 10-2
Paper Transfer Unit 10-4
Slit Glass 10-3
Coated Paper 11-20
Collate 6-9
Default 8-28
Color
Color Balance 6-19
Saturation 6-21
Color Balance 6-19
Color Regist. 8-38
Color Selection 6-19
Default 8-28
ColorCalibration 8-38
Combine 6-13
Command Center RX 2-45
Common Settings 8-19
ColorToner Empty 8-31
Date Setting 8-25
Default Screen 8-19
Display Brightness 8-19
Display Status/Log 8-31
Error Handling 8-25
Format SD Card 8-30
Function Defaults 8-28
Language 8-19
Login Operation 8-30
Low Toner Alert 8-31
Measurement 8-24
Optional Memory 8-30
Orig./Paper Set. 8-20
Preset Limit 8-24
RAM Disk Mode 8-30
Sound 8-19
Timer Setting 8-26
USB Keyboard Type 8-31
Connecting
LAN Cable 2-8
Power Cable 2-9
USB cable 2-9
Connection Method 2-7
Continuous Scan 6-17
Default 8-29
Contrast 6-20, 8-38
Contrast (Copy) 8-38
Contrast (Send) 8-38
Conventions Used in This Guide xix
Copy 5-12
Copy Denst. Adj. 8-38
Copy Settings 8-32
Auto % Priority 8-32
AutoPaperSelect. 8-32
DP Read Action 8-32
Paper Selection 8-32
Select Key Setting 8-32
Copy Speed 11-22
Correct. Bk Line 8-38
Counting the Number of Pages Printed
Counter 2-43
Each Job Account 9-35
Print Accounting Report 9-36
Total Accounting 9-35
Unknown ID Job 9-38
D
Date Format 8-25
Date Setting
Date Format 8-25
Date/Time 8-25
Summer Time 8-25
Time Zone 8-25
Date/Time 8-25
Date/Timer/Energy Saver
EnergySaver RecoveryLevel 8-32
Index-2
Default Gateway 11-25
Settings 8-10
Default Screen 8-19
Density 6-17
Destination
Adding a Destination 3-20
Address Book 5-28
Checking and Editing 5-32
Confirmation Screen of Destinations 5-32
Destination Check 8-35
Multi Sending 5-25
One Touch Key 3-27
Search 5-29, 5-30
Sort 8-37
Destination Check
Check before Send 8-35
Check New Destination 8-35
Device 7-14
DHCP 11-25
Settings 8-10
DHCP (IPv6) 11-26
Settings 8-11
Display Brightness 8-19
Display Status/Log 8-31
Document Box
Job Box 4-10, 5-34
Removable Memory Box 5-34
Document Box Settings 8-36
Job Box 8-36
Polling Box 8-36
Select Key Setting 8-36
Sub Address Box 8-36
Document Processor 2-2
Loading Originals 5-3
Originals Not Supported by the Document
Processor 5-3
Originals Supported by the Document
Processor 5-3
Part Names 2-2
dpi 11-26
Duplex 6-9
E
EcoPrint 6-17, 11-26
Default 8-28
Printer 8-33
Edit Destination 8-37
Address Book 3-20
Address Book Defaults 8-37
Contact 3-20
Group 3-23
One Touch Key 3-27
E-mail Settings 2-51
E-mail Subject/Body 6-28
Default 8-28
Emulation 11-26
Selection 8-33
Encrypted PDF 6-29
Energy Saver Recovery Level 8-32
Energy Saving Control Function 1-17
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program 1-17
Enhanced WSD 11-26
Protocol Settings 8-15
EnhancedWSD (SSL)
Protocol Settings 8-15
Entry
File Name 6-18
Subject 6-28
Environment 1-3
Err. Clear Timer 8-27
Error Handling 8-25
eSCL
Protocol Settings 8-15
eSCL over SSL
Protocol Settings 8-16
Expansion Memory 11-3
F
FAX 8-36
Feed Cover 2-4
File
Format 6-24
PDF 6-26
Separation 6-28
File Format 6-24
Default 8-29
File Name Entry 6-18
Default 8-28
File Separation 6-28
Default 8-29
Finishing Binding 6-10
First Copy Time 11-22
First Print Time 11-23
Format SD Card 8-30
FTP 11-26
FTP (Clien)
Protocol Settings 8-12
FTP (Server)
Protocol Settings 8-12
FTP Encrypted TX 6-28
Function Defaults 8-28
Fuser Cover 2-4
G
Glossary 11-25
Google Cloud Print 4-9
GPL/LGPL 1-12
Grayscale 11-26
Group Authorization Set. 9-14
Group Authorization 9-14
Group Authorization Settings 9-14
Guest Authorization Set. 9-15
Guest Authorization 9-15
Guest Property 9-16
Guides Provided with the Machine xvi
H
Handle 2-2, 2-3
Help 11-26
Index-3
Help Screen 2-14
High Compression PDF 6-25
Host Name 8-7
HTTP
Protocol Settings 8-14
HTTPS
Protocol Settings 8-14
I
I/F Block Set. 8-17
Image Quality 6-24
Inner Tray 2-2
Install
Macintosh 2-38
Software 2-30
Uninstalling 2-37
Windows 2-31
IP Address 11-26
Settings 8-10
IPP 11-26
Protocol Settings 8-13
IPP over SSL
Protocol Settings 8-14
IPSec
Settings 8-12
J
Job
Available Status 7-2
Canceling 7-13
Checking History 7-8
Checking Status 7-2
Displaying History Screen 7-9
Displaying Status Screens 7-2
Pause and Resumption 7-13
Sending the Log History 7-12
Job Accounting 9-22
Adding an Account 9-25
Counting the Number of Pages Printed 9-35
Default Setting 9-34
Deleting an Account 9-29
Editing an Account 9-28
Enabling Job Accounting 9-23
FAX Driver 9-33
Job Accounting Access 9-24
Login 9-37
Logout 9-37
Overview of Job Accounting 9-22
Print Accounting Report 9-36
Printing 9-30
Restricting the Use of the Machine 9-27
TWAIN 9-31
WIA 9-32
Job Box 11-27
Deletion of Job Retention 8-36
Private Print Box 4-11
Proof and Hold Box 4-15
Quick Copy Box 4-14
Quick Copy Jobs 8-36
Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing
the Job 4-10
Stored Job Box 4-12
Job Finish Notice 6-18
JPEG/TIFF Print 6-30
Default 8-29
K
Knopflerfish License 1-14
KPDL 11-27
L
Label 11-18
LAN Cable 2-7
Connecting 2-8
Language 8-19
LDAP
Protocol Settings 8-14
Legal Information 1-11
Legal Restriction on Copying 1-9
Legal Restriction on Scanning 1-9
Limited Use of This Product 1-10
LINE Connector 2-4
Loading Originals 5-2
Loading Originals in the Document Processor 5-3
Placing Originals on the Platen 5-2
Login 2-15
Login Operation 8-30
Logout 2-16
Low Toner Alert 8-31
LPD
Protocol Settings 8-13
M
Management 9-1
Manual Settings (IPv6) 8-11
Measurement 8-24
Media Type Setting 8-24
Mixed Size Originals 6-16
Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1-13
Mopria 4-9
MP Tray Settings 8-23
Multi Sending 5-25
Multipurpose Tray 2-4, 11-27
Paper Size and Media Type 8-23
N
NetBEUI 11-27
Protocol Settings 8-12
Network
Preparation 2-18
Settings 8-7
Network Interface 2-7
Network Interface Connector 2-4
Notice 1-2
NW InterfaceSend 8-16
Index-4
O
One Touch Key
Adding 3-27
Editing and Deleting 3-28
OpenSSL License 1-12
Operation Panel 2-2
Option
Card Authentication Kit 11-4
Expansion Memory 11-3
Overview 11-2
Paper Feeder (500-sheet) 11-4
SD/SDHC Memory Card 11-4
ThinPrint Option 11-4
USB Keyboard 11-5
Optional Applications 11-6
Optional Function 8-17
Optional Memory 8-30
Orig./Paper Set. 8-20
Original
Auto Detect Original Size (DP) 8-20
Custom Orig. Size 8-20
Default Original Size 8-20
Settings 8-20
Size xx
Original eject table 2-2
Original Image 6-16
Default 8-28
Original Orientation 6-15
Default 8-28
Original Size 6-15
Original Size Indicator Plates 2-2
Original SSLeay License 1-12
Original Stopper 2-2
Original Table 2-2
Original Width Guides 2-2
Outline font 11-27
P
Panel Reset Timer 8-26
Paper
Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper 7-15
Appropriate Paper 11-14
Cassette 8-23
Custom Paper Size 8-21
Default Paper Source 8-22
Loading Cardstock 5-7
Loading Envelopes 5-7
Loading Paper 3-2
Loading Paper in the Cassettes 3-4, 3-7
Media for Auto 8-21
Media Type Setting 8-21
Multipurpose Tray 8-23
Precaution for Loading Paper 3-7
Size and Media Type 11-13
Special Paper 11-17
Special Paper Action 8-22
Specifications 11-13
Weight 8-24
Paper Feed Mode 8-34
Paper Feeder (500-sheet) 11-4
Paper Jams 10-32
Cassette 1 10-33
Cassette 2 10-33
Document Processor 10-42
Jam Location Indicators 10-32
Multipurpose Tray 10-36
Rear Cover 1 10-39
Paper Length Guide 2-4, 3-4, 3-7
Paper Selection 6-8
Paper Stopper 2-2, 3-9
Paper Width Guides 2-4, 3-4, 3-7
Part Names 2-2
PDF/A 6-24, 11-27
Ping 8-16
Platen 2-2
POP3 11-27
Protocol Settings 8-13
PostScript 11-27
Power Cable
Connecting 2-9
Power Management 1-17
Power Off 2-10
Power On 2-10
Power Switch 2-2
PPM 11-27
Precaution for Loading Paper 3-4, 3-7
Precautions for Use 1-4
Preset Limit 8-24
Print Settings 4-2, 4-8
Printer 8-33
Auto Cassette Change 8-34
Color Setting 8-33
Copies 8-33
CR Action 8-34
Duplex 8-33
EcoPrint 8-33
Emulation Set. 8-33
Form Feed TimeOut 8-34
Gloss Mode 8-33
Job Name 8-34
LF Action 8-34
MP Tray Priority 8-34
Orientation 8-33
Override A4/Letter 8-33
Paper Feed Mode 8-34
Print setting 4-2
User Name 8-34
Wide A4 8-33
Printer Driver 11-27
Help 4-3
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB
Memory 5-35
Printing from PC 4-4
Printing Speed 11-23
Priority Override 6-18
Product Library xvii
Index-5
Program 5-8
Deleting 5-10
Overwriting 5-10
Recalling 5-9
Registering 5-8
R
RA (Stateless) 11-27
RA(Stateless)
Settings 8-11
RAM Disk 11-28
RAM Disk Mode 8-30
Raw
Protocol Settings 8-13
Rear Cover 1 2-3
Rear Cover 2 2-6
Recycled Paper 11-20
Regarding Trade Names 1-11
Regular Maintenance 10-2
Toner Container Replacement 10-5
Report 8-5
Admin Report Settings 8-6
Job Log History 8-6
Report Print 8-5
Result Report Settings 8-6
Report Print
Font List 8-5
Menu Map 8-5
Status Page 8-5
Resolution 6-22, 11-22, 11-23
Resource Saving - Paper 1-17
Responding to Messages 10-16
Restart 8-17
Restart Network 8-16
Right Cover 2-2
S
Safety Conventions in This Guide 1-2
Saturation 6-21
Saving Documents to USB Memory 5-37
Scan Resolution 6-22
Default 8-28
SD Card 11-4
Format 8-30
SD/SDHC Memory Card 11-4
Secure Settings 8-16
Security Level 8-17
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN 1-9
Select Key Setting 8-32, 8-35, 8-36
Send and Forward 8-35
Send as E-mail 5-14
Send Result 8-6
Send Settings 8-35
Default Screen 8-35
Destination Check 8-35
New Destination Entry 8-35
Recall Destination 8-35
Select Key Setting 8-35
Send and Forward 8-35
Send to Folder (FTP) 5-14
Send to Folder (SMB) 5-14
Send/Box Density 8-38
Sending 5-14
Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 3-10
Sending Size 6-23
Service Setting 8-38
Setting Date and Time 2-17
Sharpness 6-20
Skip Blank Page 6-22
Sleep 2-26
Sleep Level 2-28, 8-26
Sleep Rules 2-27, 8-26
Sleep Timer 8-26
Slit Glass 2-2
SMB
Protocol Settings 8-13
SMTP 11-28
Protocol Settings 8-13
SNMPv1/v2c
Protocol Settings 8-13
SNMPv3
Protocol Settings 8-12
Solving Malfunctions 10-9
Sound 8-19
Specifications 11-21
Copy Functions 11-22
Document Processor 11-24
Machine 11-21
Paper Feeder (500-sheet) 11-24
Printer Functions 11-23
Scanner Functions 11-23
SSL 8-16
Status Page 11-28
Status/Job Cancel 7-1
Storing Size 6-29
Subject/Body
Default 8-28
Subnet Mask 11-28
Settings 8-10
Supplies
Checking the Remaining Amount 7-15
Symbols 1-2
System Menu 8-2
Adjustment/Maintenance 8-38
Common Settings 8-19
Copy 8-32
Document Box 8-36
Edit Destination 8-37
FAX 8-36
Operation Method 8-2
Printer 8-33
Report 8-5
Send 8-35
System/Network 8-7
User Login/Job Accounting 8-18
User Property 8-18, 9-9
Index-6
System/Network 8-7
I/F Block Set. 8-17
Network Setting 8-7
NW InterfaceSend 8-16
Optional Function 8-17
Restart 8-17
Security Level 8-17
T
TCP/IP 11-28
Settings 8-10, 8-11
TCP/IP (IPv4)
Settings 2-18, 8-10
TCP/IP (IPv6) 11-26
Settings 8-11
TEL Connector 2-4
Thin Print over SSL
Protocol Settings 8-14
ThinPrint
Protocol Settings 8-14
ThinPrint Option 11-4
Time Zone 8-25
Timer Setting
Auto Error Clear 8-27
Auto Panel Reset 8-26
Err. Clear Timer 8-27
PanelReset Timer 8-26
Ping Timeout 8-27
Sleep Level 8-26
Sleep Rules 8-26
Sleep Timer 8-26
Unusable Time 8-27
Toner Container (Black) 2-5
Toner Container (Cyan) 2-5
Toner Container (Magenta) 2-5
Toner Container (Yellow) 2-5
Toner Container Lock Lever 2-5
Toner Container Replacement 10-5
Tray Extension 2-4
Troubleshooting 10-9
TWAIN 11-28
Setting TWAIN Driver 2-40
U
USB 11-28
USB Cable
Connecting 2-9
USB Interface 2-7
USB Interface Connector 2-4
USB Keyboard 11-5
USB Keyboard Type 8-31
USB Memory
Printing 5-35
Remove 5-38
Save 5-37
USB Memory Slot 2-2
User Login Administration 9-2
Adding a User 9-6
Changing User Properties 9-8
Enabling User Login Administration 9-3
FAX Driver 9-13
Group Authorization Settings 9-14
Guest Authorization Set. 9-15
ID Card Settings 9-19
Login 2-15
Logout 2-16
Obtain NW User Property 9-18
Overview of User Login Administration 9-2
Printing 9-10
TWAIN 9-11
User Account Lockout Setting 9-5
WIA 9-12
User Login/Job Accounting 8-18
Job Accounting 9-22
Unknown ID Job 9-38
User Login 9-2
User Property 8-18
W
WIA 11-29
Setting WIA Driver 2-42
Wi-Fi
Settings 2-20, 8-8
Wi-Fi Direct
Settings 2-24, 8-7
Wireless Connection 1-9
Wireless Network
Settings 2-20
WPS 11-29
WSD Scan 5-22
WSD-PRINT
Protocol Settings 8-15
WSD-SCAN
Protocol Settings 8-15
X
XPS Fit to Page 6-30
XPS FitTo Page
Default 8-29
Z
Zoom 6-11
Default 8-28
KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc.
Headquarters
225 Sand Road,
Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA
Phone: +1-973-808-8444
Fax: +1-973-882-6000
Latin America
8240 NW 52nd Terrace Dawson Building, Suite 100
Miami, Florida 33166, USA
Phone: +1-305-421-6640
Fax: +1-305-421-6666
KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada
, Ltd.
6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8,
Canada
Phone: +1-905-670-4425
Fax: +1-905-670-8116
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Mexico, S.A. de C.V.
Calle Arquimedes No. 130, 4 Piso, Colonia Polanco
Chapultepec, Delegacion Miguel Hidalgo,
Distrito Federal, C.P. 11560, México
Phone: +52-555-383-2741
Fax: +52-555-383-7804
KYOCERA Document Solutions Brazil, Ltda.
Alameda África, 545, Pólo Empresarial Consbrás,
Tamboré, Santana de Parnaíba, State of São Paulo, CEP
06543-306, Brazil
Phone: +55-11-2424-5353
Fax: +55-11-2424-5304
KYOCERA Document Solutions Chile SpA
Jose Ananias 505, Macul. Santiago, Chile
Phone: +562-2350-7000
Fax: +562-2350-7150
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 3, 6-10 Talavera Road North Ryde N.S.W, 2113,
Australia
Phone: +61-2-9888-9999
Fax: +61-2-9888-9588
KYOCERA Document Solutions
New Zealand Ltd.
Ground Floor, 19 Byron Avenue, Takapuna, Auckland,
New Zealand
Phone: +64-9-415-4517
Fax: +64-9-415-4597
KYOCERA Document Solutions Asia Limited
Unit 3 & 5, 16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road
Tsuen Wan, New Territories, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2496-5678
Fax: +852-2610-2063
KYOCERA Document Solutions
(China) Corporation
8F, No. 288 Nanjing Road West, Huangpu District,
Shanghai,200003, China
Phone: +86-21-5301-1777
Fax: +86-21-5302-8300
KYOCERA Document Solutions
(Thailand) Corp., Ltd.
335 Ratchadapisek Road, Wongsawang, Bangsue,
Bangkok 10800,
Thailand
Phone: +66-2-586-0333
Fax: +66-2-586-0278
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Singapore Pte. Ltd.
12 Tai Seng Street #04-01A,
Luxasia Building, Singapore 534118
Phone: +65-6741-8733
Fax: +65-6748-3788
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Hong Kong Limited
Unit 1,2,4,6,8 & 10, 16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle
Peak Road Tsuen Wan, New Territories, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-3582-4000
Fax: +852-3185-1399
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Taiwan Corporation
6F., No.37, Sec. 3, Minquan E. Rd.,
Zhongshan Dist., Taipei 104, Taiwan R.O.C.
Phone: +886-2-2507-6709
Fax: +886-2-2507-8432
KYOCERA Document Solutions Korea Co., Ltd.
#3F Daewoo Foundation Bldg 18, Toegye-ro, Jung-gu,
Seoul, Korea
Phone: +822-6933-4050
Fax: +822-747-0084
KYOCERA Document Solutions
India Private Limited
Second Floor, Centrum Plaza, Golf Course Road,
Sector-53, Gurgaon, Haryana 122002, India
Phone: +91-0124-4671000
Fax: +91-0124-4671001
KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B.V.
Bloemlaan 4, 2132 NP Hoofddorp,
The Netherlands
Phone: +31-20-654-0000
Fax: +31-20-653-1256
KYOCERA Document Solutions Nederland B.V.
Beechavenue 25, 1119 RA Schiphol-Rijk,
The Netherlands
Phone: +31-20-5877200
Fax: +31-20-5877260
KYOCERA Document Solutions (U.K.) Limited
Eldon Court, 75-77 London Road,
Reading, Berkshire RG1 5BS,
United Kingdom
Phone: +44-118-931-1500
Fax: +44-118-931-1108
KYOCERA Document Solutions Italia S.p.A.
Via Monfalcone 15, 20132, Milano, Italy,
Phone: +39-02-921791
Fax: +39-02-92179-600
KYOCERA Document Solutions Belgium N.V.
Sint-Martinusweg 199-201 1930 Zaventem,
Belgium
Phone: +32-2-7209270
Fax: +32-2-7208748
KYOCERA Document Solutions France S.A.S.
Espace Technologique de St Aubin
Route de IOrme 91195 Gif-sur-Yvette CEDEX,
France
Phone: +33-1-69852600
Fax: +33-1-69853409
KYOCERA Document Solutions Espana, S.A.
Edificio Kyocera, Avda. de Manacor No.2,
28290 Las Matas (Madrid), Spain
Phone: +34-91-6318392
Fax: +34-91-6318219
KYOCERA Document Solutions Finland Oy
Atomitie 5C, 00370 Helsinki,
Finland
Phone: +358-9-47805200
Fax: +358-9-47805390
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Europe B.V., Amsterdam (NL) Zürich Branch
Hohlstrasse 614, 8048 Zürich,
Switzerland
Phone: +41-44-9084949
Fax: +41-44-9084950
KYOCERA Bilgitas Document Solutions
Turkey A.S.
Gülbahar Mahallesi Otello Kamil Sk. No:6 Mecidiyeköy
34394 ili stanbul, Turkey
Phone: +90-212-356-7000
Fax: +90-212-356-6725
is a trademark of KYOCERA Corporation
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Deutschland GmbH
Otto-Hahn-Strasse 12, 40670 Meerbusch,
Germany
Phone: +49-2159-9180
Fax: +49-2159-918100
KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH
Altmannsdorferstraße 91, Stiege 1, 2. OG, Top 1, 1120,
Wien, Austria
Phone: +43-1-863380
Fax: +43-1-86338-400
KYOCERA Document Solutions Nordic AB
Esbogatan 16B 164 75 Kista, Sweden
Phone: +46-8-546-550-00
Fax: +46-8-546-550-10
KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf
Olaf Helsetsv. 6, 0619 Oslo, Norway
Phone: +47-22-62-73-00
Fax: +47-22-62-72-00
KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A/S
Ejby Industrivej 60, DK-2600 Glostrup,
Denmark
Phone: +45-70223880
Fax: +45-45765850
KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda.
Rua do Centro Cultural, 41 (Alvalade) 1700-106 Lisboa,
Portugal
Phone: +351-21-843-6780
Fax: +351-21-849-3312
KYOCERA Document Solutions
South Africa (Pty) Ltd.
KYOCERA House, Hertford Office Park,
90 Bekker Road (Cnr. Allandale), Midrand, South Africa
Phone: +27-11-540-2600
Fax: +27-11-466-3050
KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC.
Building 2, 51/4, Schepkina St., 129110, Moscow,
Russia
Phone: +7(495)741-0004
Fax: +7(495)741-0018
KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East
Dubai Internet City, Bldg. 17,
Office 157 P.O. Box 500817, Dubai,
United Arab Emirates
Phone: +971-04-433-0412
KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.
2-28, 1-chome, Tamatsukuri, Chuo-ku
Osaka 540-8585, Japan
Phone: +81-6-6764-3555
http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com
© 2016 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.
Rev.2 2016.9
2R9KDEN002